1 /* SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0-only */ 2 /* 3 * mac80211 <-> driver interface 4 * 5 * Copyright 2002-2005, Devicescape Software, Inc. 6 * Copyright 2006-2007 Jiri Benc <jbenc@suse.cz> 7 * Copyright 2007-2010 Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> 8 * Copyright 2013-2014 Intel Mobile Communications GmbH 9 * Copyright (C) 2015 - 2017 Intel Deutschland GmbH 10 * Copyright (C) 2018 - 2022 Intel Corporation 11 */ 12 13 #ifndef MAC80211_H 14 #define MAC80211_H 15 16 #include <linux/bug.h> 17 #include <linux/kernel.h> 18 #include <linux/if_ether.h> 19 #include <linux/skbuff.h> 20 #include <linux/ieee80211.h> 21 #include <linux/lockdep.h> 22 #include <net/cfg80211.h> 23 #include <net/codel.h> 24 #include <net/ieee80211_radiotap.h> 25 #include <asm/unaligned.h> 26 27 /** 28 * DOC: Introduction 29 * 30 * mac80211 is the Linux stack for 802.11 hardware that implements 31 * only partial functionality in hard- or firmware. This document 32 * defines the interface between mac80211 and low-level hardware 33 * drivers. 34 */ 35 36 /** 37 * DOC: Calling mac80211 from interrupts 38 * 39 * Only ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() can be 40 * called in hardware interrupt context. The low-level driver must not call any 41 * other functions in hardware interrupt context. If there is a need for such 42 * call, the low-level driver should first ACK the interrupt and perform the 43 * IEEE 802.11 code call after this, e.g. from a scheduled workqueue or even 44 * tasklet function. 45 * 46 * NOTE: If the driver opts to use the _irqsafe() functions, it may not also 47 * use the non-IRQ-safe functions! 48 */ 49 50 /** 51 * DOC: Warning 52 * 53 * If you're reading this document and not the header file itself, it will 54 * be incomplete because not all documentation has been converted yet. 55 */ 56 57 /** 58 * DOC: Frame format 59 * 60 * As a general rule, when frames are passed between mac80211 and the driver, 61 * they start with the IEEE 802.11 header and include the same octets that are 62 * sent over the air except for the FCS which should be calculated by the 63 * hardware. 64 * 65 * There are, however, various exceptions to this rule for advanced features: 66 * 67 * The first exception is for hardware encryption and decryption offload 68 * where the IV/ICV may or may not be generated in hardware. 69 * 70 * Secondly, when the hardware handles fragmentation, the frame handed to 71 * the driver from mac80211 is the MSDU, not the MPDU. 72 */ 73 74 /** 75 * DOC: mac80211 workqueue 76 * 77 * mac80211 provides its own workqueue for drivers and internal mac80211 use. 78 * The workqueue is a single threaded workqueue and can only be accessed by 79 * helpers for sanity checking. Drivers must ensure all work added onto the 80 * mac80211 workqueue should be cancelled on the driver stop() callback. 81 * 82 * mac80211 will flushed the workqueue upon interface removal and during 83 * suspend. 84 * 85 * All work performed on the mac80211 workqueue must not acquire the RTNL lock. 86 * 87 */ 88 89 /** 90 * DOC: mac80211 software tx queueing 91 * 92 * mac80211 provides an optional intermediate queueing implementation designed 93 * to allow the driver to keep hardware queues short and provide some fairness 94 * between different stations/interfaces. 95 * In this model, the driver pulls data frames from the mac80211 queue instead 96 * of letting mac80211 push them via drv_tx(). 97 * Other frames (e.g. control or management) are still pushed using drv_tx(). 98 * 99 * Drivers indicate that they use this model by implementing the .wake_tx_queue 100 * driver operation. 101 * 102 * Intermediate queues (struct ieee80211_txq) are kept per-sta per-tid, with 103 * another per-sta for non-data/non-mgmt and bufferable management frames, and 104 * a single per-vif queue for multicast data frames. 105 * 106 * The driver is expected to initialize its private per-queue data for stations 107 * and interfaces in the .add_interface and .sta_add ops. 108 * 109 * The driver can't access the queue directly. To dequeue a frame from a 110 * txq, it calls ieee80211_tx_dequeue(). Whenever mac80211 adds a new frame to a 111 * queue, it calls the .wake_tx_queue driver op. 112 * 113 * Drivers can optionally delegate responsibility for scheduling queues to 114 * mac80211, to take advantage of airtime fairness accounting. In this case, to 115 * obtain the next queue to pull frames from, the driver calls 116 * ieee80211_next_txq(). The driver is then expected to return the txq using 117 * ieee80211_return_txq(). 118 * 119 * For AP powersave TIM handling, the driver only needs to indicate if it has 120 * buffered packets in the driver specific data structures by calling 121 * ieee80211_sta_set_buffered(). For frames buffered in the ieee80211_txq 122 * struct, mac80211 sets the appropriate TIM PVB bits and calls 123 * .release_buffered_frames(). 124 * In that callback the driver is therefore expected to release its own 125 * buffered frames and afterwards also frames from the ieee80211_txq (obtained 126 * via the usual ieee80211_tx_dequeue). 127 */ 128 129 /** 130 * DOC: HW timestamping 131 * 132 * Timing Measurement and Fine Timing Measurement require accurate timestamps 133 * of the action frames TX/RX and their respective acks. 134 * 135 * To report hardware timestamps for Timing Measurement or Fine Timing 136 * Measurement frame RX, the low level driver should set the SKB's hwtstamp 137 * field to the frame RX timestamp and report the ack TX timestamp in the 138 * ieee80211_rx_status struct. 139 * 140 * Similarly, To report hardware timestamps for Timing Measurement or Fine 141 * Timing Measurement frame TX, the driver should set the SKB's hwtstamp field 142 * to the frame TX timestamp and report the ack RX timestamp in the 143 * ieee80211_tx_status struct. 144 */ 145 struct device; 146 147 /** 148 * enum ieee80211_max_queues - maximum number of queues 149 * 150 * @IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES: Maximum number of regular device queues. 151 * @IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUE_MAP: bitmap with maximum queues set 152 */ 153 enum ieee80211_max_queues { 154 IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES = 16, 155 IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUE_MAP = BIT(IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES) - 1, 156 }; 157 158 #define IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE 0xff 159 160 /** 161 * enum ieee80211_ac_numbers - AC numbers as used in mac80211 162 * @IEEE80211_AC_VO: voice 163 * @IEEE80211_AC_VI: video 164 * @IEEE80211_AC_BE: best effort 165 * @IEEE80211_AC_BK: background 166 */ 167 enum ieee80211_ac_numbers { 168 IEEE80211_AC_VO = 0, 169 IEEE80211_AC_VI = 1, 170 IEEE80211_AC_BE = 2, 171 IEEE80211_AC_BK = 3, 172 }; 173 174 /** 175 * struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params - transmit queue configuration 176 * 177 * The information provided in this structure is required for QoS 178 * transmit queue configuration. Cf. IEEE 802.11 7.3.2.29. 179 * 180 * @aifs: arbitration interframe space [0..255] 181 * @cw_min: minimum contention window [a value of the form 182 * 2^n-1 in the range 1..32767] 183 * @cw_max: maximum contention window [like @cw_min] 184 * @txop: maximum burst time in units of 32 usecs, 0 meaning disabled 185 * @acm: is mandatory admission control required for the access category 186 * @uapsd: is U-APSD mode enabled for the queue 187 * @mu_edca: is the MU EDCA configured 188 * @mu_edca_param_rec: MU EDCA Parameter Record for HE 189 */ 190 struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params { 191 u16 txop; 192 u16 cw_min; 193 u16 cw_max; 194 u8 aifs; 195 bool acm; 196 bool uapsd; 197 bool mu_edca; 198 struct ieee80211_he_mu_edca_param_ac_rec mu_edca_param_rec; 199 }; 200 201 struct ieee80211_low_level_stats { 202 unsigned int dot11ACKFailureCount; 203 unsigned int dot11RTSFailureCount; 204 unsigned int dot11FCSErrorCount; 205 unsigned int dot11RTSSuccessCount; 206 }; 207 208 /** 209 * enum ieee80211_chanctx_change - change flag for channel context 210 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_WIDTH: The channel width changed 211 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RX_CHAINS: The number of RX chains changed 212 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RADAR: radar detection flag changed 213 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_CHANNEL: switched to another operating channel, 214 * this is used only with channel switching with CSA 215 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_MIN_WIDTH: The min required channel width changed 216 */ 217 enum ieee80211_chanctx_change { 218 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_WIDTH = BIT(0), 219 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RX_CHAINS = BIT(1), 220 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RADAR = BIT(2), 221 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_CHANNEL = BIT(3), 222 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_MIN_WIDTH = BIT(4), 223 }; 224 225 /** 226 * struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf - channel context that vifs may be tuned to 227 * 228 * This is the driver-visible part. The ieee80211_chanctx 229 * that contains it is visible in mac80211 only. 230 * 231 * @def: the channel definition 232 * @min_def: the minimum channel definition currently required. 233 * @rx_chains_static: The number of RX chains that must always be 234 * active on the channel to receive MIMO transmissions 235 * @rx_chains_dynamic: The number of RX chains that must be enabled 236 * after RTS/CTS handshake to receive SMPS MIMO transmissions; 237 * this will always be >= @rx_chains_static. 238 * @radar_enabled: whether radar detection is enabled on this channel. 239 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to 240 * sizeof(void *), size is determined in hw information. 241 */ 242 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf { 243 struct cfg80211_chan_def def; 244 struct cfg80211_chan_def min_def; 245 246 u8 rx_chains_static, rx_chains_dynamic; 247 248 bool radar_enabled; 249 250 u8 drv_priv[] __aligned(sizeof(void *)); 251 }; 252 253 /** 254 * enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode - channel context switch mode 255 * @CHANCTX_SWMODE_REASSIGN_VIF: Both old and new contexts already 256 * exist (and will continue to exist), but the virtual interface 257 * needs to be switched from one to the other. 258 * @CHANCTX_SWMODE_SWAP_CONTEXTS: The old context exists but will stop 259 * to exist with this call, the new context doesn't exist but 260 * will be active after this call, the virtual interface switches 261 * from the old to the new (note that the driver may of course 262 * implement this as an on-the-fly chandef switch of the existing 263 * hardware context, but the mac80211 pointer for the old context 264 * will cease to exist and only the new one will later be used 265 * for changes/removal.) 266 */ 267 enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode { 268 CHANCTX_SWMODE_REASSIGN_VIF, 269 CHANCTX_SWMODE_SWAP_CONTEXTS, 270 }; 271 272 /** 273 * struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch - vif chanctx switch information 274 * 275 * This is structure is used to pass information about a vif that 276 * needs to switch from one chanctx to another. The 277 * &ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode defines how the switch should be 278 * done. 279 * 280 * @vif: the vif that should be switched from old_ctx to new_ctx 281 * @link_conf: the link conf that's switching 282 * @old_ctx: the old context to which the vif was assigned 283 * @new_ctx: the new context to which the vif must be assigned 284 */ 285 struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch { 286 struct ieee80211_vif *vif; 287 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *link_conf; 288 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *old_ctx; 289 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *new_ctx; 290 }; 291 292 /** 293 * enum ieee80211_bss_change - BSS change notification flags 294 * 295 * These flags are used with the bss_info_changed(), link_info_changed() 296 * and vif_cfg_changed() callbacks to indicate which parameter(s) changed. 297 * 298 * @BSS_CHANGED_ASSOC: association status changed (associated/disassociated), 299 * also implies a change in the AID. 300 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_CTS_PROT: CTS protection changed 301 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_PREAMBLE: preamble changed 302 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_SLOT: slot timing changed 303 * @BSS_CHANGED_HT: 802.11n parameters changed 304 * @BSS_CHANGED_BASIC_RATES: Basic rateset changed 305 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INT: Beacon interval changed 306 * @BSS_CHANGED_BSSID: BSSID changed, for whatever 307 * reason (IBSS and managed mode) 308 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON: Beacon data changed, retrieve 309 * new beacon (beaconing modes) 310 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_ENABLED: Beaconing should be 311 * enabled/disabled (beaconing modes) 312 * @BSS_CHANGED_CQM: Connection quality monitor config changed 313 * @BSS_CHANGED_IBSS: IBSS join status changed 314 * @BSS_CHANGED_ARP_FILTER: Hardware ARP filter address list or state changed. 315 * @BSS_CHANGED_QOS: QoS for this association was enabled/disabled. Note 316 * that it is only ever disabled for station mode. 317 * @BSS_CHANGED_IDLE: Idle changed for this BSS/interface. 318 * @BSS_CHANGED_SSID: SSID changed for this BSS (AP and IBSS mode) 319 * @BSS_CHANGED_AP_PROBE_RESP: Probe Response changed for this BSS (AP mode) 320 * @BSS_CHANGED_PS: PS changed for this BSS (STA mode) 321 * @BSS_CHANGED_TXPOWER: TX power setting changed for this interface 322 * @BSS_CHANGED_P2P_PS: P2P powersave settings (CTWindow, opportunistic PS) 323 * changed 324 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO: Data from the AP's beacon became available: 325 * currently dtim_period only is under consideration. 326 * @BSS_CHANGED_BANDWIDTH: The bandwidth used by this interface changed, 327 * note that this is only called when it changes after the channel 328 * context had been assigned. 329 * @BSS_CHANGED_OCB: OCB join status changed 330 * @BSS_CHANGED_MU_GROUPS: VHT MU-MIMO group id or user position changed 331 * @BSS_CHANGED_KEEP_ALIVE: keep alive options (idle period or protected 332 * keep alive) changed. 333 * @BSS_CHANGED_MCAST_RATE: Multicast Rate setting changed for this interface 334 * @BSS_CHANGED_FTM_RESPONDER: fine timing measurement request responder 335 * functionality changed for this BSS (AP mode). 336 * @BSS_CHANGED_TWT: TWT status changed 337 * @BSS_CHANGED_HE_OBSS_PD: OBSS Packet Detection status changed. 338 * @BSS_CHANGED_HE_BSS_COLOR: BSS Color has changed 339 * @BSS_CHANGED_FILS_DISCOVERY: FILS discovery status changed. 340 * @BSS_CHANGED_UNSOL_BCAST_PROBE_RESP: Unsolicited broadcast probe response 341 * status changed. 342 * 343 */ 344 enum ieee80211_bss_change { 345 BSS_CHANGED_ASSOC = 1<<0, 346 BSS_CHANGED_ERP_CTS_PROT = 1<<1, 347 BSS_CHANGED_ERP_PREAMBLE = 1<<2, 348 BSS_CHANGED_ERP_SLOT = 1<<3, 349 BSS_CHANGED_HT = 1<<4, 350 BSS_CHANGED_BASIC_RATES = 1<<5, 351 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INT = 1<<6, 352 BSS_CHANGED_BSSID = 1<<7, 353 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON = 1<<8, 354 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_ENABLED = 1<<9, 355 BSS_CHANGED_CQM = 1<<10, 356 BSS_CHANGED_IBSS = 1<<11, 357 BSS_CHANGED_ARP_FILTER = 1<<12, 358 BSS_CHANGED_QOS = 1<<13, 359 BSS_CHANGED_IDLE = 1<<14, 360 BSS_CHANGED_SSID = 1<<15, 361 BSS_CHANGED_AP_PROBE_RESP = 1<<16, 362 BSS_CHANGED_PS = 1<<17, 363 BSS_CHANGED_TXPOWER = 1<<18, 364 BSS_CHANGED_P2P_PS = 1<<19, 365 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO = 1<<20, 366 BSS_CHANGED_BANDWIDTH = 1<<21, 367 BSS_CHANGED_OCB = 1<<22, 368 BSS_CHANGED_MU_GROUPS = 1<<23, 369 BSS_CHANGED_KEEP_ALIVE = 1<<24, 370 BSS_CHANGED_MCAST_RATE = 1<<25, 371 BSS_CHANGED_FTM_RESPONDER = 1<<26, 372 BSS_CHANGED_TWT = 1<<27, 373 BSS_CHANGED_HE_OBSS_PD = 1<<28, 374 BSS_CHANGED_HE_BSS_COLOR = 1<<29, 375 BSS_CHANGED_FILS_DISCOVERY = 1<<30, 376 BSS_CHANGED_UNSOL_BCAST_PROBE_RESP = 1<<31, 377 378 /* when adding here, make sure to change ieee80211_reconfig */ 379 }; 380 381 /* 382 * The maximum number of IPv4 addresses listed for ARP filtering. If the number 383 * of addresses for an interface increase beyond this value, hardware ARP 384 * filtering will be disabled. 385 */ 386 #define IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN 4 387 388 /** 389 * enum ieee80211_event_type - event to be notified to the low level driver 390 * @RSSI_EVENT: AP's rssi crossed the a threshold set by the driver. 391 * @MLME_EVENT: event related to MLME 392 * @BAR_RX_EVENT: a BAR was received 393 * @BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT: Frames were released from the reordering buffer because 394 * they timed out. This won't be called for each frame released, but only 395 * once each time the timeout triggers. 396 */ 397 enum ieee80211_event_type { 398 RSSI_EVENT, 399 MLME_EVENT, 400 BAR_RX_EVENT, 401 BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT, 402 }; 403 404 /** 405 * enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data - relevant when event type is %RSSI_EVENT 406 * @RSSI_EVENT_HIGH: AP's rssi went below the threshold set by the driver. 407 * @RSSI_EVENT_LOW: AP's rssi went above the threshold set by the driver. 408 */ 409 enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data { 410 RSSI_EVENT_HIGH, 411 RSSI_EVENT_LOW, 412 }; 413 414 /** 415 * struct ieee80211_rssi_event - data attached to an %RSSI_EVENT 416 * @data: See &enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data 417 */ 418 struct ieee80211_rssi_event { 419 enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data data; 420 }; 421 422 /** 423 * enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data - relevant when event type is %MLME_EVENT 424 * @AUTH_EVENT: the MLME operation is authentication 425 * @ASSOC_EVENT: the MLME operation is association 426 * @DEAUTH_RX_EVENT: deauth received.. 427 * @DEAUTH_TX_EVENT: deauth sent. 428 */ 429 enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data { 430 AUTH_EVENT, 431 ASSOC_EVENT, 432 DEAUTH_RX_EVENT, 433 DEAUTH_TX_EVENT, 434 }; 435 436 /** 437 * enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status - relevant when event type is %MLME_EVENT 438 * @MLME_SUCCESS: the MLME operation completed successfully. 439 * @MLME_DENIED: the MLME operation was denied by the peer. 440 * @MLME_TIMEOUT: the MLME operation timed out. 441 */ 442 enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status { 443 MLME_SUCCESS, 444 MLME_DENIED, 445 MLME_TIMEOUT, 446 }; 447 448 /** 449 * struct ieee80211_mlme_event - data attached to an %MLME_EVENT 450 * @data: See &enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data 451 * @status: See &enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status 452 * @reason: the reason code if applicable 453 */ 454 struct ieee80211_mlme_event { 455 enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data data; 456 enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status status; 457 u16 reason; 458 }; 459 460 /** 461 * struct ieee80211_ba_event - data attached for BlockAck related events 462 * @sta: pointer to the &ieee80211_sta to which this event relates 463 * @tid: the tid 464 * @ssn: the starting sequence number (for %BAR_RX_EVENT) 465 */ 466 struct ieee80211_ba_event { 467 struct ieee80211_sta *sta; 468 u16 tid; 469 u16 ssn; 470 }; 471 472 /** 473 * struct ieee80211_event - event to be sent to the driver 474 * @type: The event itself. See &enum ieee80211_event_type. 475 * @rssi: relevant if &type is %RSSI_EVENT 476 * @mlme: relevant if &type is %AUTH_EVENT 477 * @ba: relevant if &type is %BAR_RX_EVENT or %BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT 478 * @u:union holding the fields above 479 */ 480 struct ieee80211_event { 481 enum ieee80211_event_type type; 482 union { 483 struct ieee80211_rssi_event rssi; 484 struct ieee80211_mlme_event mlme; 485 struct ieee80211_ba_event ba; 486 } u; 487 }; 488 489 /** 490 * struct ieee80211_mu_group_data - STA's VHT MU-MIMO group data 491 * 492 * This structure describes the group id data of VHT MU-MIMO 493 * 494 * @membership: 64 bits array - a bit is set if station is member of the group 495 * @position: 2 bits per group id indicating the position in the group 496 */ 497 struct ieee80211_mu_group_data { 498 u8 membership[WLAN_MEMBERSHIP_LEN]; 499 u8 position[WLAN_USER_POSITION_LEN]; 500 }; 501 502 /** 503 * struct ieee80211_ftm_responder_params - FTM responder parameters 504 * 505 * @lci: LCI subelement content 506 * @civicloc: CIVIC location subelement content 507 * @lci_len: LCI data length 508 * @civicloc_len: Civic data length 509 */ 510 struct ieee80211_ftm_responder_params { 511 const u8 *lci; 512 const u8 *civicloc; 513 size_t lci_len; 514 size_t civicloc_len; 515 }; 516 517 /** 518 * struct ieee80211_fils_discovery - FILS discovery parameters from 519 * IEEE Std 802.11ai-2016, Annex C.3 MIB detail. 520 * 521 * @min_interval: Minimum packet interval in TUs (0 - 10000) 522 * @max_interval: Maximum packet interval in TUs (0 - 10000) 523 */ 524 struct ieee80211_fils_discovery { 525 u32 min_interval; 526 u32 max_interval; 527 }; 528 529 /** 530 * struct ieee80211_bss_conf - holds the BSS's changing parameters 531 * 532 * This structure keeps information about a BSS (and an association 533 * to that BSS) that can change during the lifetime of the BSS. 534 * 535 * @addr: (link) address used locally 536 * @link_id: link ID, or 0 for non-MLO 537 * @htc_trig_based_pkt_ext: default PE in 4us units, if BSS supports HE 538 * @uora_exists: is the UORA element advertised by AP 539 * @ack_enabled: indicates support to receive a multi-TID that solicits either 540 * ACK, BACK or both 541 * @uora_ocw_range: UORA element's OCW Range field 542 * @frame_time_rts_th: HE duration RTS threshold, in units of 32us 543 * @he_support: does this BSS support HE 544 * @twt_requester: does this BSS support TWT requester (relevant for managed 545 * mode only, set if the AP advertises TWT responder role) 546 * @twt_responder: does this BSS support TWT requester (relevant for managed 547 * mode only, set if the AP advertises TWT responder role) 548 * @twt_protected: does this BSS support protected TWT frames 549 * @twt_broadcast: does this BSS support broadcast TWT 550 * @use_cts_prot: use CTS protection 551 * @use_short_preamble: use 802.11b short preamble 552 * @use_short_slot: use short slot time (only relevant for ERP) 553 * @dtim_period: num of beacons before the next DTIM, for beaconing, 554 * valid in station mode only if after the driver was notified 555 * with the %BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO flag, will be non-zero then. 556 * @sync_tsf: last beacon's/probe response's TSF timestamp (could be old 557 * as it may have been received during scanning long ago). If the 558 * HW flag %IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY is set, then this can 559 * only come from a beacon, but might not become valid until after 560 * association when a beacon is received (which is notified with the 561 * %BSS_CHANGED_DTIM flag.). See also sync_dtim_count important notice. 562 * @sync_device_ts: the device timestamp corresponding to the sync_tsf, 563 * the driver/device can use this to calculate synchronisation 564 * (see @sync_tsf). See also sync_dtim_count important notice. 565 * @sync_dtim_count: Only valid when %IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY 566 * is requested, see @sync_tsf/@sync_device_ts. 567 * IMPORTANT: These three sync_* parameters would possibly be out of sync 568 * by the time the driver will use them. The synchronized view is currently 569 * guaranteed only in certain callbacks. 570 * Note also that this is not used with MLD associations, mac80211 doesn't 571 * know how to track beacons for all of the links for this. 572 * @beacon_int: beacon interval 573 * @assoc_capability: capabilities taken from assoc resp 574 * @basic_rates: bitmap of basic rates, each bit stands for an 575 * index into the rate table configured by the driver in 576 * the current band. 577 * @beacon_rate: associated AP's beacon TX rate 578 * @mcast_rate: per-band multicast rate index + 1 (0: disabled) 579 * @bssid: The BSSID for this BSS 580 * @enable_beacon: whether beaconing should be enabled or not 581 * @chandef: Channel definition for this BSS -- the hardware might be 582 * configured a higher bandwidth than this BSS uses, for example. 583 * @mu_group: VHT MU-MIMO group membership data 584 * @ht_operation_mode: HT operation mode like in &struct ieee80211_ht_operation. 585 * This field is only valid when the channel is a wide HT/VHT channel. 586 * Note that with TDLS this can be the case (channel is HT, protection must 587 * be used from this field) even when the BSS association isn't using HT. 588 * @cqm_rssi_thold: Connection quality monitor RSSI threshold, a zero value 589 * implies disabled. As with the cfg80211 callback, a change here should 590 * cause an event to be sent indicating where the current value is in 591 * relation to the newly configured threshold. 592 * @cqm_rssi_low: Connection quality monitor RSSI lower threshold, a zero value 593 * implies disabled. This is an alternative mechanism to the single 594 * threshold event and can't be enabled simultaneously with it. 595 * @cqm_rssi_high: Connection quality monitor RSSI upper threshold. 596 * @cqm_rssi_hyst: Connection quality monitor RSSI hysteresis 597 * @qos: This is a QoS-enabled BSS. 598 * @hidden_ssid: The SSID of the current vif is hidden. Only valid in AP-mode. 599 * @txpower: TX power in dBm. INT_MIN means not configured. 600 * @txpower_type: TX power adjustment used to control per packet Transmit 601 * Power Control (TPC) in lower driver for the current vif. In particular 602 * TPC is enabled if value passed in %txpower_type is 603 * NL80211_TX_POWER_LIMITED (allow using less than specified from 604 * userspace), whereas TPC is disabled if %txpower_type is set to 605 * NL80211_TX_POWER_FIXED (use value configured from userspace) 606 * @p2p_noa_attr: P2P NoA attribute for P2P powersave 607 * @allow_p2p_go_ps: indication for AP or P2P GO interface, whether it's allowed 608 * to use P2P PS mechanism or not. AP/P2P GO is not allowed to use P2P PS 609 * if it has associated clients without P2P PS support. 610 * @max_idle_period: the time period during which the station can refrain from 611 * transmitting frames to its associated AP without being disassociated. 612 * In units of 1000 TUs. Zero value indicates that the AP did not include 613 * a (valid) BSS Max Idle Period Element. 614 * @protected_keep_alive: if set, indicates that the station should send an RSN 615 * protected frame to the AP to reset the idle timer at the AP for the 616 * station. 617 * @ftm_responder: whether to enable or disable fine timing measurement FTM 618 * responder functionality. 619 * @ftmr_params: configurable lci/civic parameter when enabling FTM responder. 620 * @nontransmitted: this BSS is a nontransmitted BSS profile 621 * @transmitter_bssid: the address of transmitter AP 622 * @bssid_index: index inside the multiple BSSID set 623 * @bssid_indicator: 2^bssid_indicator is the maximum number of APs in set 624 * @ema_ap: AP supports enhancements of discovery and advertisement of 625 * nontransmitted BSSIDs 626 * @profile_periodicity: the least number of beacon frames need to be received 627 * in order to discover all the nontransmitted BSSIDs in the set. 628 * @he_oper: HE operation information of the BSS (AP/Mesh) or of the AP we are 629 * connected to (STA) 630 * @he_obss_pd: OBSS Packet Detection parameters. 631 * @he_bss_color: BSS coloring settings, if BSS supports HE 632 * @fils_discovery: FILS discovery configuration 633 * @unsol_bcast_probe_resp_interval: Unsolicited broadcast probe response 634 * interval. 635 * @beacon_tx_rate: The configured beacon transmit rate that needs to be passed 636 * to driver when rate control is offloaded to firmware. 637 * @power_type: power type of BSS for 6 GHz 638 * @tx_pwr_env: transmit power envelope array of BSS. 639 * @tx_pwr_env_num: number of @tx_pwr_env. 640 * @pwr_reduction: power constraint of BSS. 641 * @eht_support: does this BSS support EHT 642 * @csa_active: marks whether a channel switch is going on. Internally it is 643 * write-protected by sdata_lock and local->mtx so holding either is fine 644 * for read access. 645 * @mu_mimo_owner: indicates interface owns MU-MIMO capability 646 * @chanctx_conf: The channel context this interface is assigned to, or %NULL 647 * when it is not assigned. This pointer is RCU-protected due to the TX 648 * path needing to access it; even though the netdev carrier will always 649 * be off when it is %NULL there can still be races and packets could be 650 * processed after it switches back to %NULL. 651 * @color_change_active: marks whether a color change is ongoing. Internally it is 652 * write-protected by sdata_lock and local->mtx so holding either is fine 653 * for read access. 654 * @color_change_color: the bss color that will be used after the change. 655 */ 656 struct ieee80211_bss_conf { 657 const u8 *bssid; 658 unsigned int link_id; 659 u8 addr[ETH_ALEN] __aligned(2); 660 u8 htc_trig_based_pkt_ext; 661 bool uora_exists; 662 u8 uora_ocw_range; 663 u16 frame_time_rts_th; 664 bool he_support; 665 bool twt_requester; 666 bool twt_responder; 667 bool twt_protected; 668 bool twt_broadcast; 669 /* erp related data */ 670 bool use_cts_prot; 671 bool use_short_preamble; 672 bool use_short_slot; 673 bool enable_beacon; 674 u8 dtim_period; 675 u16 beacon_int; 676 u16 assoc_capability; 677 u64 sync_tsf; 678 u32 sync_device_ts; 679 u8 sync_dtim_count; 680 u32 basic_rates; 681 struct ieee80211_rate *beacon_rate; 682 int mcast_rate[NUM_NL80211_BANDS]; 683 u16 ht_operation_mode; 684 s32 cqm_rssi_thold; 685 u32 cqm_rssi_hyst; 686 s32 cqm_rssi_low; 687 s32 cqm_rssi_high; 688 struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef; 689 struct ieee80211_mu_group_data mu_group; 690 bool qos; 691 bool hidden_ssid; 692 int txpower; 693 enum nl80211_tx_power_setting txpower_type; 694 struct ieee80211_p2p_noa_attr p2p_noa_attr; 695 bool allow_p2p_go_ps; 696 u16 max_idle_period; 697 bool protected_keep_alive; 698 bool ftm_responder; 699 struct ieee80211_ftm_responder_params *ftmr_params; 700 /* Multiple BSSID data */ 701 bool nontransmitted; 702 u8 transmitter_bssid[ETH_ALEN]; 703 u8 bssid_index; 704 u8 bssid_indicator; 705 bool ema_ap; 706 u8 profile_periodicity; 707 struct { 708 u32 params; 709 u16 nss_set; 710 } he_oper; 711 struct ieee80211_he_obss_pd he_obss_pd; 712 struct cfg80211_he_bss_color he_bss_color; 713 struct ieee80211_fils_discovery fils_discovery; 714 u32 unsol_bcast_probe_resp_interval; 715 struct cfg80211_bitrate_mask beacon_tx_rate; 716 enum ieee80211_ap_reg_power power_type; 717 struct ieee80211_tx_pwr_env tx_pwr_env[IEEE80211_TPE_MAX_IE_COUNT]; 718 u8 tx_pwr_env_num; 719 u8 pwr_reduction; 720 bool eht_support; 721 722 bool csa_active; 723 bool mu_mimo_owner; 724 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf __rcu *chanctx_conf; 725 726 bool color_change_active; 727 u8 color_change_color; 728 }; 729 730 /** 731 * enum mac80211_tx_info_flags - flags to describe transmission information/status 732 * 733 * These flags are used with the @flags member of &ieee80211_tx_info. 734 * 735 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS: require TX status callback for this frame. 736 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_ASSIGN_SEQ: The driver has to assign a sequence 737 * number to this frame, taking care of not overwriting the fragment 738 * number and increasing the sequence number only when the 739 * IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT flag is set. mac80211 will properly 740 * assign sequence numbers to QoS-data frames but cannot do so correctly 741 * for non-QoS-data and management frames because beacons need them from 742 * that counter as well and mac80211 cannot guarantee proper sequencing. 743 * If this flag is set, the driver should instruct the hardware to 744 * assign a sequence number to the frame or assign one itself. Cf. IEEE 745 * 802.11-2007 7.1.3.4.1 paragraph 3. This flag will always be set for 746 * beacons and always be clear for frames without a sequence number field. 747 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK: tell the low level not to wait for an ack 748 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT: clear powersave filter for destination 749 * station 750 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT: this is a first fragment of the frame 751 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM: send this frame after DTIM beacon 752 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU: this frame should be sent as part of an A-MPDU 753 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_INJECTED: Frame was injected, internal to mac80211. 754 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED: The frame was not transmitted 755 * because the destination STA was in powersave mode. Note that to 756 * avoid race conditions, the filter must be set by the hardware or 757 * firmware upon receiving a frame that indicates that the station 758 * went to sleep (must be done on device to filter frames already on 759 * the queue) and may only be unset after mac80211 gives the OK for 760 * that by setting the IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT (see above), 761 * since only then is it guaranteed that no more frames are in the 762 * hardware queue. 763 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK: Frame was acknowledged 764 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU: The frame was aggregated, so status 765 * is for the whole aggregation. 766 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK: no block ack was returned, 767 * so consider using block ack request (BAR). 768 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE: internal to mac80211, can be 769 * set by rate control algorithms to indicate probe rate, will 770 * be cleared for fragmented frames (except on the last fragment) 771 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_OFFCHAN_TX_OK: Internal to mac80211. Used to indicate 772 * that a frame can be transmitted while the queues are stopped for 773 * off-channel operation. 774 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_HW_80211_ENCAP: This frame uses hardware encapsulation 775 * (header conversion) 776 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRIED: completely internal to mac80211, 777 * used to indicate that a frame was already retried due to PS 778 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_DONT_ENCRYPT: completely internal to mac80211, 779 * used to indicate frame should not be encrypted 780 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER: This frame is a response to a poll 781 * frame (PS-Poll or uAPSD) or a non-bufferable MMPDU and must 782 * be sent although the station is in powersave mode. 783 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES: More frames will be passed to the 784 * transmit function after the current frame, this can be used 785 * by drivers to kick the DMA queue only if unset or when the 786 * queue gets full. 787 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRANSMISSION: This frame is being retransmitted 788 * after TX status because the destination was asleep, it must not 789 * be modified again (no seqno assignment, crypto, etc.) 790 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_MLME_CONN_TX: This frame was transmitted by the MLME 791 * code for connection establishment, this indicates that its status 792 * should kick the MLME state machine. 793 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NL80211_FRAME_TX: Frame was requested through nl80211 794 * MLME command (internal to mac80211 to figure out whether to send TX 795 * status to user space) 796 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC: tells the driver to use LDPC for this frame 797 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC: Enables Space-Time Block Coding (STBC) for this 798 * frame and selects the maximum number of streams that it can use. 799 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN: Marks this packet to be transmitted on 800 * the off-channel channel when a remain-on-channel offload is done 801 * in hardware -- normal packets still flow and are expected to be 802 * handled properly by the device. 803 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_TKIP_MIC_FAILURE: Marks this packet to be used for TKIP 804 * testing. It will be sent out with incorrect Michael MIC key to allow 805 * TKIP countermeasures to be tested. 806 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_CCK_RATE: This frame will be sent at non CCK rate. 807 * This flag is actually used for management frame especially for P2P 808 * frames not being sent at CCK rate in 2GHz band. 809 * @IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP: This packet marks the end of service period, 810 * when its status is reported the service period ends. For frames in 811 * an SP that mac80211 transmits, it is already set; for driver frames 812 * the driver may set this flag. It is also used to do the same for 813 * PS-Poll responses. 814 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_USE_MINRATE: This frame will be sent at lowest rate. 815 * This flag is used to send nullfunc frame at minimum rate when 816 * the nullfunc is used for connection monitoring purpose. 817 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_DONTFRAG: Don't fragment this packet even if it 818 * would be fragmented by size (this is optional, only used for 819 * monitor injection). 820 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_NOACK_TRANSMITTED: A frame that was marked with 821 * IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK has been successfully transmitted without 822 * any errors (like issues specific to the driver/HW). 823 * This flag must not be set for frames that don't request no-ack 824 * behaviour with IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK. 825 * 826 * Note: If you have to add new flags to the enumeration, then don't 827 * forget to update %IEEE80211_TX_TEMPORARY_FLAGS when necessary. 828 */ 829 enum mac80211_tx_info_flags { 830 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS = BIT(0), 831 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_ASSIGN_SEQ = BIT(1), 832 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK = BIT(2), 833 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT = BIT(3), 834 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT = BIT(4), 835 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM = BIT(5), 836 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU = BIT(6), 837 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_INJECTED = BIT(7), 838 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED = BIT(8), 839 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK = BIT(9), 840 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU = BIT(10), 841 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK = BIT(11), 842 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE = BIT(12), 843 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_OFFCHAN_TX_OK = BIT(13), 844 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_HW_80211_ENCAP = BIT(14), 845 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRIED = BIT(15), 846 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_DONT_ENCRYPT = BIT(16), 847 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER = BIT(17), 848 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES = BIT(18), 849 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRANSMISSION = BIT(19), 850 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_MLME_CONN_TX = BIT(20), 851 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NL80211_FRAME_TX = BIT(21), 852 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC = BIT(22), 853 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC = BIT(23) | BIT(24), 854 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN = BIT(25), 855 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_TKIP_MIC_FAILURE = BIT(26), 856 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_CCK_RATE = BIT(27), 857 IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP = BIT(28), 858 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_USE_MINRATE = BIT(29), 859 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_DONTFRAG = BIT(30), 860 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_NOACK_TRANSMITTED = BIT(31), 861 }; 862 863 #define IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC_SHIFT 23 864 865 #define IEEE80211_TX_RC_S1G_MCS IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS 866 867 /** 868 * enum mac80211_tx_control_flags - flags to describe transmit control 869 * 870 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PORT_CTRL_PROTO: this frame is a port control 871 * protocol frame (e.g. EAP) 872 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PS_RESPONSE: This frame is a response to a poll 873 * frame (PS-Poll or uAPSD). 874 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_RATE_INJECT: This frame is injected with rate information 875 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_AMSDU: This frame is an A-MSDU frame 876 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_FAST_XMIT: This frame is going through the fast_xmit path 877 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_SKIP_MPATH_LOOKUP: This frame skips mesh path lookup 878 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTCFL_NEED_TXPROCESSING: completely internal to mac80211, 879 * used to indicate that a pending frame requires TX processing before 880 * it can be sent out. 881 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_NO_SEQNO: Do not overwrite the sequence number that 882 * has already been assigned to this frame. 883 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_DONT_REORDER: This frame should not be reordered 884 * relative to other frames that have this flag set, independent 885 * of their QoS TID or other priority field values. 886 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_MCAST_MLO_FIRST_TX: first MLO TX, used mostly internally 887 * for sequence number assignment 888 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_MLO_LINK: If not @IEEE80211_LINK_UNSPECIFIED, this 889 * frame should be transmitted on the specific link. This really is 890 * only relevant for frames that do not have data present, and is 891 * also not used for 802.3 format frames. Note that even if the frame 892 * is on a specific link, address translation might still apply if 893 * it's intended for an MLD. 894 * 895 * These flags are used in tx_info->control.flags. 896 */ 897 enum mac80211_tx_control_flags { 898 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PORT_CTRL_PROTO = BIT(0), 899 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PS_RESPONSE = BIT(1), 900 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_RATE_INJECT = BIT(2), 901 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_AMSDU = BIT(3), 902 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_FAST_XMIT = BIT(4), 903 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_SKIP_MPATH_LOOKUP = BIT(5), 904 IEEE80211_TX_INTCFL_NEED_TXPROCESSING = BIT(6), 905 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_NO_SEQNO = BIT(7), 906 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_DONT_REORDER = BIT(8), 907 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_MCAST_MLO_FIRST_TX = BIT(9), 908 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_MLO_LINK = 0xf0000000, 909 }; 910 911 #define IEEE80211_LINK_UNSPECIFIED 0xf 912 #define IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_MLO_LINK_UNSPEC \ 913 u32_encode_bits(IEEE80211_LINK_UNSPECIFIED, \ 914 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_MLO_LINK) 915 916 /** 917 * enum mac80211_tx_status_flags - flags to describe transmit status 918 * 919 * @IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_ACK_SIGNAL_VALID: ACK signal is valid 920 * 921 * These flags are used in tx_info->status.flags. 922 */ 923 enum mac80211_tx_status_flags { 924 IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_ACK_SIGNAL_VALID = BIT(0), 925 }; 926 927 /* 928 * This definition is used as a mask to clear all temporary flags, which are 929 * set by the tx handlers for each transmission attempt by the mac80211 stack. 930 */ 931 #define IEEE80211_TX_TEMPORARY_FLAGS (IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK | \ 932 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT | \ 933 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU | \ 934 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED | IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK | \ 935 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU | IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK | \ 936 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER | \ 937 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC | \ 938 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC | IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP) 939 940 /** 941 * enum mac80211_rate_control_flags - per-rate flags set by the 942 * Rate Control algorithm. 943 * 944 * These flags are set by the Rate control algorithm for each rate during tx, 945 * in the @flags member of struct ieee80211_tx_rate. 946 * 947 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_RTS_CTS: Use RTS/CTS exchange for this rate. 948 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_CTS_PROTECT: CTS-to-self protection is required. 949 * This is set if the current BSS requires ERP protection. 950 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_SHORT_PREAMBLE: Use short preamble. 951 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_MCS: HT rate. 952 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS: VHT MCS rate, in this case the idx field is split 953 * into a higher 4 bits (Nss) and lower 4 bits (MCS number) 954 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_GREEN_FIELD: Indicates whether this rate should be used in 955 * Greenfield mode. 956 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_40_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates if the Channel Width should be 40 MHz. 957 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_80_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates 80 MHz transmission 958 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_160_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates 160 MHz transmission 959 * (80+80 isn't supported yet) 960 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_DUP_DATA: The frame should be transmitted on both of the 961 * adjacent 20 MHz channels, if the current channel type is 962 * NL80211_CHAN_HT40MINUS or NL80211_CHAN_HT40PLUS. 963 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_SHORT_GI: Short Guard interval should be used for this rate. 964 */ 965 enum mac80211_rate_control_flags { 966 IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_RTS_CTS = BIT(0), 967 IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_CTS_PROTECT = BIT(1), 968 IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_SHORT_PREAMBLE = BIT(2), 969 970 /* rate index is an HT/VHT MCS instead of an index */ 971 IEEE80211_TX_RC_MCS = BIT(3), 972 IEEE80211_TX_RC_GREEN_FIELD = BIT(4), 973 IEEE80211_TX_RC_40_MHZ_WIDTH = BIT(5), 974 IEEE80211_TX_RC_DUP_DATA = BIT(6), 975 IEEE80211_TX_RC_SHORT_GI = BIT(7), 976 IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS = BIT(8), 977 IEEE80211_TX_RC_80_MHZ_WIDTH = BIT(9), 978 IEEE80211_TX_RC_160_MHZ_WIDTH = BIT(10), 979 }; 980 981 982 /* there are 40 bytes if you don't need the rateset to be kept */ 983 #define IEEE80211_TX_INFO_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE 40 984 985 /* if you do need the rateset, then you have less space */ 986 #define IEEE80211_TX_INFO_RATE_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE 24 987 988 /* maximum number of rate stages */ 989 #define IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES 4 990 991 /* maximum number of rate table entries */ 992 #define IEEE80211_TX_RATE_TABLE_SIZE 4 993 994 /** 995 * struct ieee80211_tx_rate - rate selection/status 996 * 997 * @idx: rate index to attempt to send with 998 * @flags: rate control flags (&enum mac80211_rate_control_flags) 999 * @count: number of tries in this rate before going to the next rate 1000 * 1001 * A value of -1 for @idx indicates an invalid rate and, if used 1002 * in an array of retry rates, that no more rates should be tried. 1003 * 1004 * When used for transmit status reporting, the driver should 1005 * always report the rate along with the flags it used. 1006 * 1007 * &struct ieee80211_tx_info contains an array of these structs 1008 * in the control information, and it will be filled by the rate 1009 * control algorithm according to what should be sent. For example, 1010 * if this array contains, in the format { <idx>, <count> } the 1011 * information:: 1012 * 1013 * { 3, 2 }, { 2, 2 }, { 1, 4 }, { -1, 0 }, { -1, 0 } 1014 * 1015 * then this means that the frame should be transmitted 1016 * up to twice at rate 3, up to twice at rate 2, and up to four 1017 * times at rate 1 if it doesn't get acknowledged. Say it gets 1018 * acknowledged by the peer after the fifth attempt, the status 1019 * information should then contain:: 1020 * 1021 * { 3, 2 }, { 2, 2 }, { 1, 1 }, { -1, 0 } ... 1022 * 1023 * since it was transmitted twice at rate 3, twice at rate 2 1024 * and once at rate 1 after which we received an acknowledgement. 1025 */ 1026 struct ieee80211_tx_rate { 1027 s8 idx; 1028 u16 count:5, 1029 flags:11; 1030 } __packed; 1031 1032 #define IEEE80211_MAX_TX_RETRY 31 1033 1034 static inline void ieee80211_rate_set_vht(struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate, 1035 u8 mcs, u8 nss) 1036 { 1037 WARN_ON(mcs & ~0xF); 1038 WARN_ON((nss - 1) & ~0x7); 1039 rate->idx = ((nss - 1) << 4) | mcs; 1040 } 1041 1042 static inline u8 1043 ieee80211_rate_get_vht_mcs(const struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate) 1044 { 1045 return rate->idx & 0xF; 1046 } 1047 1048 static inline u8 1049 ieee80211_rate_get_vht_nss(const struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate) 1050 { 1051 return (rate->idx >> 4) + 1; 1052 } 1053 1054 /** 1055 * struct ieee80211_tx_info - skb transmit information 1056 * 1057 * This structure is placed in skb->cb for three uses: 1058 * (1) mac80211 TX control - mac80211 tells the driver what to do 1059 * (2) driver internal use (if applicable) 1060 * (3) TX status information - driver tells mac80211 what happened 1061 * 1062 * @flags: transmit info flags, defined above 1063 * @band: the band to transmit on (use e.g. for checking for races), 1064 * not valid if the interface is an MLD since we won't know which 1065 * link the frame will be transmitted on 1066 * @hw_queue: HW queue to put the frame on, skb_get_queue_mapping() gives the AC 1067 * @ack_frame_id: internal frame ID for TX status, used internally 1068 * @tx_time_est: TX time estimate in units of 4us, used internally 1069 * @control: union part for control data 1070 * @control.rates: TX rates array to try 1071 * @control.rts_cts_rate_idx: rate for RTS or CTS 1072 * @control.use_rts: use RTS 1073 * @control.use_cts_prot: use RTS/CTS 1074 * @control.short_preamble: use short preamble (CCK only) 1075 * @control.skip_table: skip externally configured rate table 1076 * @control.jiffies: timestamp for expiry on powersave clients 1077 * @control.vif: virtual interface (may be NULL) 1078 * @control.hw_key: key to encrypt with (may be NULL) 1079 * @control.flags: control flags, see &enum mac80211_tx_control_flags 1080 * @control.enqueue_time: enqueue time (for iTXQs) 1081 * @driver_rates: alias to @control.rates to reserve space 1082 * @pad: padding 1083 * @rate_driver_data: driver use area if driver needs @control.rates 1084 * @status: union part for status data 1085 * @status.rates: attempted rates 1086 * @status.ack_signal: ACK signal 1087 * @status.ampdu_ack_len: AMPDU ack length 1088 * @status.ampdu_len: AMPDU length 1089 * @status.antenna: (legacy, kept only for iwlegacy) 1090 * @status.tx_time: airtime consumed for transmission; note this is only 1091 * used for WMM AC, not for airtime fairness 1092 * @status.flags: status flags, see &enum mac80211_tx_status_flags 1093 * @status.status_driver_data: driver use area 1094 * @ack: union part for pure ACK data 1095 * @ack.cookie: cookie for the ACK 1096 * @driver_data: array of driver_data pointers 1097 * @ampdu_ack_len: number of acked aggregated frames. 1098 * relevant only if IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU was set. 1099 * @ampdu_len: number of aggregated frames. 1100 * relevant only if IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU was set. 1101 * @ack_signal: signal strength of the ACK frame 1102 */ 1103 struct ieee80211_tx_info { 1104 /* common information */ 1105 u32 flags; 1106 u32 band:3, 1107 ack_frame_id:13, 1108 hw_queue:4, 1109 tx_time_est:10; 1110 /* 2 free bits */ 1111 1112 union { 1113 struct { 1114 union { 1115 /* rate control */ 1116 struct { 1117 struct ieee80211_tx_rate rates[ 1118 IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES]; 1119 s8 rts_cts_rate_idx; 1120 u8 use_rts:1; 1121 u8 use_cts_prot:1; 1122 u8 short_preamble:1; 1123 u8 skip_table:1; 1124 /* 2 bytes free */ 1125 }; 1126 /* only needed before rate control */ 1127 unsigned long jiffies; 1128 }; 1129 /* NB: vif can be NULL for injected frames */ 1130 struct ieee80211_vif *vif; 1131 struct ieee80211_key_conf *hw_key; 1132 u32 flags; 1133 codel_time_t enqueue_time; 1134 } control; 1135 struct { 1136 u64 cookie; 1137 } ack; 1138 struct { 1139 struct ieee80211_tx_rate rates[IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES]; 1140 s32 ack_signal; 1141 u8 ampdu_ack_len; 1142 u8 ampdu_len; 1143 u8 antenna; 1144 u16 tx_time; 1145 u8 flags; 1146 void *status_driver_data[18 / sizeof(void *)]; 1147 } status; 1148 struct { 1149 struct ieee80211_tx_rate driver_rates[ 1150 IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES]; 1151 u8 pad[4]; 1152 1153 void *rate_driver_data[ 1154 IEEE80211_TX_INFO_RATE_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE / sizeof(void *)]; 1155 }; 1156 void *driver_data[ 1157 IEEE80211_TX_INFO_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE / sizeof(void *)]; 1158 }; 1159 }; 1160 1161 static inline u16 1162 ieee80211_info_set_tx_time_est(struct ieee80211_tx_info *info, u16 tx_time_est) 1163 { 1164 /* We only have 10 bits in tx_time_est, so store airtime 1165 * in increments of 4us and clamp the maximum to 2**12-1 1166 */ 1167 info->tx_time_est = min_t(u16, tx_time_est, 4095) >> 2; 1168 return info->tx_time_est << 2; 1169 } 1170 1171 static inline u16 1172 ieee80211_info_get_tx_time_est(struct ieee80211_tx_info *info) 1173 { 1174 return info->tx_time_est << 2; 1175 } 1176 1177 /*** 1178 * struct ieee80211_rate_status - mrr stage for status path 1179 * 1180 * This struct is used in struct ieee80211_tx_status to provide drivers a 1181 * dynamic way to report about used rates and power levels per packet. 1182 * 1183 * @rate_idx The actual used rate. 1184 * @try_count How often the rate was tried. 1185 * @tx_power_idx An idx into the ieee80211_hw->tx_power_levels list of the 1186 * corresponding wifi hardware. The idx shall point to the power level 1187 * that was used when sending the packet. 1188 */ 1189 struct ieee80211_rate_status { 1190 struct rate_info rate_idx; 1191 u8 try_count; 1192 u8 tx_power_idx; 1193 }; 1194 1195 /** 1196 * struct ieee80211_tx_status - extended tx status info for rate control 1197 * 1198 * @sta: Station that the packet was transmitted for 1199 * @info: Basic tx status information 1200 * @skb: Packet skb (can be NULL if not provided by the driver) 1201 * @rates: Mrr stages that were used when sending the packet 1202 * @n_rates: Number of mrr stages (count of instances for @rates) 1203 * @free_list: list where processed skbs are stored to be free'd by the driver 1204 * @ack_hwtstamp: Hardware timestamp of the received ack in nanoseconds 1205 * Only needed for Timing measurement and Fine timing measurement action 1206 * frames. Only reported by devices that have timestamping enabled. 1207 */ 1208 struct ieee80211_tx_status { 1209 struct ieee80211_sta *sta; 1210 struct ieee80211_tx_info *info; 1211 struct sk_buff *skb; 1212 struct ieee80211_rate_status *rates; 1213 ktime_t ack_hwtstamp; 1214 u8 n_rates; 1215 1216 struct list_head *free_list; 1217 }; 1218 1219 /** 1220 * struct ieee80211_scan_ies - descriptors for different blocks of IEs 1221 * 1222 * This structure is used to point to different blocks of IEs in HW scan 1223 * and scheduled scan. These blocks contain the IEs passed by userspace 1224 * and the ones generated by mac80211. 1225 * 1226 * @ies: pointers to band specific IEs. 1227 * @len: lengths of band_specific IEs. 1228 * @common_ies: IEs for all bands (especially vendor specific ones) 1229 * @common_ie_len: length of the common_ies 1230 */ 1231 struct ieee80211_scan_ies { 1232 const u8 *ies[NUM_NL80211_BANDS]; 1233 size_t len[NUM_NL80211_BANDS]; 1234 const u8 *common_ies; 1235 size_t common_ie_len; 1236 }; 1237 1238 1239 static inline struct ieee80211_tx_info *IEEE80211_SKB_CB(struct sk_buff *skb) 1240 { 1241 return (struct ieee80211_tx_info *)skb->cb; 1242 } 1243 1244 static inline struct ieee80211_rx_status *IEEE80211_SKB_RXCB(struct sk_buff *skb) 1245 { 1246 return (struct ieee80211_rx_status *)skb->cb; 1247 } 1248 1249 /** 1250 * ieee80211_tx_info_clear_status - clear TX status 1251 * 1252 * @info: The &struct ieee80211_tx_info to be cleared. 1253 * 1254 * When the driver passes an skb back to mac80211, it must report 1255 * a number of things in TX status. This function clears everything 1256 * in the TX status but the rate control information (it does clear 1257 * the count since you need to fill that in anyway). 1258 * 1259 * NOTE: While the rates array is kept intact, this will wipe all of the 1260 * driver_data fields in info, so it's up to the driver to restore 1261 * any fields it needs after calling this helper. 1262 */ 1263 static inline void 1264 ieee80211_tx_info_clear_status(struct ieee80211_tx_info *info) 1265 { 1266 int i; 1267 1268 BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) != 1269 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, control.rates)); 1270 BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) != 1271 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, driver_rates)); 1272 BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) != 8); 1273 /* clear the rate counts */ 1274 for (i = 0; i < IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES; i++) 1275 info->status.rates[i].count = 0; 1276 memset_after(&info->status, 0, rates); 1277 } 1278 1279 1280 /** 1281 * enum mac80211_rx_flags - receive flags 1282 * 1283 * These flags are used with the @flag member of &struct ieee80211_rx_status. 1284 * @RX_FLAG_MMIC_ERROR: Michael MIC error was reported on this frame. 1285 * Use together with %RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED. 1286 * @RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED: This frame was decrypted in hardware. 1287 * @RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED: the Michael MIC is stripped off this frame, 1288 * verification has been done by the hardware. 1289 * @RX_FLAG_IV_STRIPPED: The IV and ICV are stripped from this frame. 1290 * If this flag is set, the stack cannot do any replay detection 1291 * hence the driver or hardware will have to do that. 1292 * @RX_FLAG_PN_VALIDATED: Currently only valid for CCMP/GCMP frames, this 1293 * flag indicates that the PN was verified for replay protection. 1294 * Note that this flag is also currently only supported when a frame 1295 * is also decrypted (ie. @RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED must be set) 1296 * @RX_FLAG_DUP_VALIDATED: The driver should set this flag if it did 1297 * de-duplication by itself. 1298 * @RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC: Set this flag if the FCS check failed on 1299 * the frame. 1300 * @RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC: Set this flag if the PCLP check failed on 1301 * the frame. 1302 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_START: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime 1303 * field) is valid and contains the time the first symbol of the MPDU 1304 * was received. This is useful in monitor mode and for proper IBSS 1305 * merging. 1306 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_END: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime 1307 * field) is valid and contains the time the last symbol of the MPDU 1308 * (including FCS) was received. 1309 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_PLCP_START: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime 1310 * field) is valid and contains the time the SYNC preamble was received. 1311 * @RX_FLAG_NO_SIGNAL_VAL: The signal strength value is not present. 1312 * Valid only for data frames (mainly A-MPDU) 1313 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DETAILS: A-MPDU details are known, in particular the reference 1314 * number (@ampdu_reference) must be populated and be a distinct number for 1315 * each A-MPDU 1316 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_LAST_KNOWN: last subframe is known, should be set on all 1317 * subframes of a single A-MPDU 1318 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_LAST: this subframe is the last subframe of the A-MPDU 1319 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_ERROR: A delimiter CRC error has been detected 1320 * on this subframe 1321 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_KNOWN: The delimiter CRC field is known (the CRC 1322 * is stored in the @ampdu_delimiter_crc field) 1323 * @RX_FLAG_MIC_STRIPPED: The mic was stripped of this packet. Decryption was 1324 * done by the hardware 1325 * @RX_FLAG_ONLY_MONITOR: Report frame only to monitor interfaces without 1326 * processing it in any regular way. 1327 * This is useful if drivers offload some frames but still want to report 1328 * them for sniffing purposes. 1329 * @RX_FLAG_SKIP_MONITOR: Process and report frame to all interfaces except 1330 * monitor interfaces. 1331 * This is useful if drivers offload some frames but still want to report 1332 * them for sniffing purposes. 1333 * @RX_FLAG_AMSDU_MORE: Some drivers may prefer to report separate A-MSDU 1334 * subframes instead of a one huge frame for performance reasons. 1335 * All, but the last MSDU from an A-MSDU should have this flag set. E.g. 1336 * if an A-MSDU has 3 frames, the first 2 must have the flag set, while 1337 * the 3rd (last) one must not have this flag set. The flag is used to 1338 * deal with retransmission/duplication recovery properly since A-MSDU 1339 * subframes share the same sequence number. Reported subframes can be 1340 * either regular MSDU or singly A-MSDUs. Subframes must not be 1341 * interleaved with other frames. 1342 * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_VENDOR_DATA: This frame contains vendor-specific 1343 * radiotap data in the skb->data (before the frame) as described by 1344 * the &struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap. 1345 * @RX_FLAG_ALLOW_SAME_PN: Allow the same PN as same packet before. 1346 * This is used for AMSDU subframes which can have the same PN as 1347 * the first subframe. 1348 * @RX_FLAG_ICV_STRIPPED: The ICV is stripped from this frame. CRC checking must 1349 * be done in the hardware. 1350 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT: Value of the EOF bit in the A-MPDU delimiter for this 1351 * frame 1352 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT_KNOWN: The EOF value is known 1353 * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE: HE radiotap data is present 1354 * (&struct ieee80211_radiotap_he, mac80211 will fill in 1355 * 1356 * - DATA3_DATA_MCS 1357 * - DATA3_DATA_DCM 1358 * - DATA3_CODING 1359 * - DATA5_GI 1360 * - DATA5_DATA_BW_RU_ALLOC 1361 * - DATA6_NSTS 1362 * - DATA3_STBC 1363 * 1364 * from the RX info data, so leave those zeroed when building this data) 1365 * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE_MU: HE MU radiotap data is present 1366 * (&struct ieee80211_radiotap_he_mu) 1367 * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_LSIG: L-SIG radiotap data is present 1368 * @RX_FLAG_NO_PSDU: use the frame only for radiotap reporting, with 1369 * the "0-length PSDU" field included there. The value for it is 1370 * in &struct ieee80211_rx_status. Note that if this value isn't 1371 * known the frame shouldn't be reported. 1372 * @RX_FLAG_8023: the frame has an 802.3 header (decap offload performed by 1373 * hardware or driver) 1374 */ 1375 enum mac80211_rx_flags { 1376 RX_FLAG_MMIC_ERROR = BIT(0), 1377 RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED = BIT(1), 1378 RX_FLAG_MACTIME_PLCP_START = BIT(2), 1379 RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED = BIT(3), 1380 RX_FLAG_IV_STRIPPED = BIT(4), 1381 RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC = BIT(5), 1382 RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC = BIT(6), 1383 RX_FLAG_MACTIME_START = BIT(7), 1384 RX_FLAG_NO_SIGNAL_VAL = BIT(8), 1385 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DETAILS = BIT(9), 1386 RX_FLAG_PN_VALIDATED = BIT(10), 1387 RX_FLAG_DUP_VALIDATED = BIT(11), 1388 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_LAST_KNOWN = BIT(12), 1389 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_LAST = BIT(13), 1390 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_ERROR = BIT(14), 1391 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_KNOWN = BIT(15), 1392 RX_FLAG_MACTIME_END = BIT(16), 1393 RX_FLAG_ONLY_MONITOR = BIT(17), 1394 RX_FLAG_SKIP_MONITOR = BIT(18), 1395 RX_FLAG_AMSDU_MORE = BIT(19), 1396 RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_VENDOR_DATA = BIT(20), 1397 RX_FLAG_MIC_STRIPPED = BIT(21), 1398 RX_FLAG_ALLOW_SAME_PN = BIT(22), 1399 RX_FLAG_ICV_STRIPPED = BIT(23), 1400 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT = BIT(24), 1401 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT_KNOWN = BIT(25), 1402 RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE = BIT(26), 1403 RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE_MU = BIT(27), 1404 RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_LSIG = BIT(28), 1405 RX_FLAG_NO_PSDU = BIT(29), 1406 RX_FLAG_8023 = BIT(30), 1407 }; 1408 1409 /** 1410 * enum mac80211_rx_encoding_flags - MCS & bandwidth flags 1411 * 1412 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORTPRE: Short preamble was used for this frame 1413 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORT_GI: Short guard interval was used 1414 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_HT_GF: This frame was received in a HT-greenfield transmission, 1415 * if the driver fills this value it should add 1416 * %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_MCS_HAVE_FMT 1417 * to @hw.radiotap_mcs_details to advertise that fact. 1418 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_LDPC: LDPC was used 1419 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_STBC_MASK: STBC 2 bit bitmask. 1 - Nss=1, 2 - Nss=2, 3 - Nss=3 1420 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_BF: packet was beamformed 1421 */ 1422 enum mac80211_rx_encoding_flags { 1423 RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORTPRE = BIT(0), 1424 RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORT_GI = BIT(2), 1425 RX_ENC_FLAG_HT_GF = BIT(3), 1426 RX_ENC_FLAG_STBC_MASK = BIT(4) | BIT(5), 1427 RX_ENC_FLAG_LDPC = BIT(6), 1428 RX_ENC_FLAG_BF = BIT(7), 1429 }; 1430 1431 #define RX_ENC_FLAG_STBC_SHIFT 4 1432 1433 enum mac80211_rx_encoding { 1434 RX_ENC_LEGACY = 0, 1435 RX_ENC_HT, 1436 RX_ENC_VHT, 1437 RX_ENC_HE, 1438 }; 1439 1440 /** 1441 * struct ieee80211_rx_status - receive status 1442 * 1443 * The low-level driver should provide this information (the subset 1444 * supported by hardware) to the 802.11 code with each received 1445 * frame, in the skb's control buffer (cb). 1446 * 1447 * @mactime: value in microseconds of the 64-bit Time Synchronization Function 1448 * (TSF) timer when the first data symbol (MPDU) arrived at the hardware. 1449 * @boottime_ns: CLOCK_BOOTTIME timestamp the frame was received at, this is 1450 * needed only for beacons and probe responses that update the scan cache. 1451 * @ack_tx_hwtstamp: Hardware timestamp for the ack TX in nanoseconds. Only 1452 * needed for Timing measurement and Fine timing measurement action frames. 1453 * Only reported by devices that have timestamping enabled. 1454 * @device_timestamp: arbitrary timestamp for the device, mac80211 doesn't use 1455 * it but can store it and pass it back to the driver for synchronisation 1456 * @band: the active band when this frame was received 1457 * @freq: frequency the radio was tuned to when receiving this frame, in MHz 1458 * This field must be set for management frames, but isn't strictly needed 1459 * for data (other) frames - for those it only affects radiotap reporting. 1460 * @freq_offset: @freq has a positive offset of 500Khz. 1461 * @signal: signal strength when receiving this frame, either in dBm, in dB or 1462 * unspecified depending on the hardware capabilities flags 1463 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_* 1464 * @chains: bitmask of receive chains for which separate signal strength 1465 * values were filled. 1466 * @chain_signal: per-chain signal strength, in dBm (unlike @signal, doesn't 1467 * support dB or unspecified units) 1468 * @antenna: antenna used 1469 * @rate_idx: index of data rate into band's supported rates or MCS index if 1470 * HT or VHT is used (%RX_FLAG_HT/%RX_FLAG_VHT) 1471 * @nss: number of streams (VHT and HE only) 1472 * @flag: %RX_FLAG_\* 1473 * @encoding: &enum mac80211_rx_encoding 1474 * @bw: &enum rate_info_bw 1475 * @enc_flags: uses bits from &enum mac80211_rx_encoding_flags 1476 * @he_ru: HE RU, from &enum nl80211_he_ru_alloc 1477 * @he_gi: HE GI, from &enum nl80211_he_gi 1478 * @he_dcm: HE DCM value 1479 * @rx_flags: internal RX flags for mac80211 1480 * @ampdu_reference: A-MPDU reference number, must be a different value for 1481 * each A-MPDU but the same for each subframe within one A-MPDU 1482 * @ampdu_delimiter_crc: A-MPDU delimiter CRC 1483 * @zero_length_psdu_type: radiotap type of the 0-length PSDU 1484 * @link_valid: if the link which is identified by @link_id is valid. This flag 1485 * is set only when connection is MLO. 1486 * @link_id: id of the link used to receive the packet. This is used along with 1487 * @link_valid. 1488 */ 1489 struct ieee80211_rx_status { 1490 u64 mactime; 1491 union { 1492 u64 boottime_ns; 1493 ktime_t ack_tx_hwtstamp; 1494 }; 1495 u32 device_timestamp; 1496 u32 ampdu_reference; 1497 u32 flag; 1498 u16 freq: 13, freq_offset: 1; 1499 u8 enc_flags; 1500 u8 encoding:2, bw:3, he_ru:3; 1501 u8 he_gi:2, he_dcm:1; 1502 u8 rate_idx; 1503 u8 nss; 1504 u8 rx_flags; 1505 u8 band; 1506 u8 antenna; 1507 s8 signal; 1508 u8 chains; 1509 s8 chain_signal[IEEE80211_MAX_CHAINS]; 1510 u8 ampdu_delimiter_crc; 1511 u8 zero_length_psdu_type; 1512 u8 link_valid:1, link_id:4; 1513 }; 1514 1515 static inline u32 1516 ieee80211_rx_status_to_khz(struct ieee80211_rx_status *rx_status) 1517 { 1518 return MHZ_TO_KHZ(rx_status->freq) + 1519 (rx_status->freq_offset ? 500 : 0); 1520 } 1521 1522 /** 1523 * struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap - vendor radiotap data information 1524 * @present: presence bitmap for this vendor namespace 1525 * (this could be extended in the future if any vendor needs more 1526 * bits, the radiotap spec does allow for that) 1527 * @align: radiotap vendor namespace alignment. This defines the needed 1528 * alignment for the @data field below, not for the vendor namespace 1529 * description itself (which has a fixed 2-byte alignment) 1530 * Must be a power of two, and be set to at least 1! 1531 * @oui: radiotap vendor namespace OUI 1532 * @subns: radiotap vendor sub namespace 1533 * @len: radiotap vendor sub namespace skip length, if alignment is done 1534 * then that's added to this, i.e. this is only the length of the 1535 * @data field. 1536 * @pad: number of bytes of padding after the @data, this exists so that 1537 * the skb data alignment can be preserved even if the data has odd 1538 * length 1539 * @data: the actual vendor namespace data 1540 * 1541 * This struct, including the vendor data, goes into the skb->data before 1542 * the 802.11 header. It's split up in mac80211 using the align/oui/subns 1543 * data. 1544 */ 1545 struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap { 1546 u32 present; 1547 u8 align; 1548 u8 oui[3]; 1549 u8 subns; 1550 u8 pad; 1551 u16 len; 1552 u8 data[]; 1553 } __packed; 1554 1555 /** 1556 * enum ieee80211_conf_flags - configuration flags 1557 * 1558 * Flags to define PHY configuration options 1559 * 1560 * @IEEE80211_CONF_MONITOR: there's a monitor interface present -- use this 1561 * to determine for example whether to calculate timestamps for packets 1562 * or not, do not use instead of filter flags! 1563 * @IEEE80211_CONF_PS: Enable 802.11 power save mode (managed mode only). 1564 * This is the power save mode defined by IEEE 802.11-2007 section 11.2, 1565 * meaning that the hardware still wakes up for beacons, is able to 1566 * transmit frames and receive the possible acknowledgment frames. 1567 * Not to be confused with hardware specific wakeup/sleep states, 1568 * driver is responsible for that. See the section "Powersave support" 1569 * for more. 1570 * @IEEE80211_CONF_IDLE: The device is running, but idle; if the flag is set 1571 * the driver should be prepared to handle configuration requests but 1572 * may turn the device off as much as possible. Typically, this flag will 1573 * be set when an interface is set UP but not associated or scanning, but 1574 * it can also be unset in that case when monitor interfaces are active. 1575 * @IEEE80211_CONF_OFFCHANNEL: The device is currently not on its main 1576 * operating channel. 1577 */ 1578 enum ieee80211_conf_flags { 1579 IEEE80211_CONF_MONITOR = (1<<0), 1580 IEEE80211_CONF_PS = (1<<1), 1581 IEEE80211_CONF_IDLE = (1<<2), 1582 IEEE80211_CONF_OFFCHANNEL = (1<<3), 1583 }; 1584 1585 1586 /** 1587 * enum ieee80211_conf_changed - denotes which configuration changed 1588 * 1589 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_LISTEN_INTERVAL: the listen interval changed 1590 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_MONITOR: the monitor flag changed 1591 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_PS: the PS flag or dynamic PS timeout changed 1592 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_POWER: the TX power changed 1593 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_CHANNEL: the channel/channel_type changed 1594 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_RETRY_LIMITS: retry limits changed 1595 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_IDLE: Idle flag changed 1596 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_SMPS: Spatial multiplexing powersave mode changed 1597 * Note that this is only valid if channel contexts are not used, 1598 * otherwise each channel context has the number of chains listed. 1599 */ 1600 enum ieee80211_conf_changed { 1601 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_SMPS = BIT(1), 1602 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_LISTEN_INTERVAL = BIT(2), 1603 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_MONITOR = BIT(3), 1604 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_PS = BIT(4), 1605 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_POWER = BIT(5), 1606 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_CHANNEL = BIT(6), 1607 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_RETRY_LIMITS = BIT(7), 1608 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_IDLE = BIT(8), 1609 }; 1610 1611 /** 1612 * enum ieee80211_smps_mode - spatial multiplexing power save mode 1613 * 1614 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_AUTOMATIC: automatic 1615 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_OFF: off 1616 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC: static 1617 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_DYNAMIC: dynamic 1618 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_NUM_MODES: internal, don't use 1619 */ 1620 enum ieee80211_smps_mode { 1621 IEEE80211_SMPS_AUTOMATIC, 1622 IEEE80211_SMPS_OFF, 1623 IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC, 1624 IEEE80211_SMPS_DYNAMIC, 1625 1626 /* keep last */ 1627 IEEE80211_SMPS_NUM_MODES, 1628 }; 1629 1630 /** 1631 * struct ieee80211_conf - configuration of the device 1632 * 1633 * This struct indicates how the driver shall configure the hardware. 1634 * 1635 * @flags: configuration flags defined above 1636 * 1637 * @listen_interval: listen interval in units of beacon interval 1638 * @ps_dtim_period: The DTIM period of the AP we're connected to, for use 1639 * in power saving. Power saving will not be enabled until a beacon 1640 * has been received and the DTIM period is known. 1641 * @dynamic_ps_timeout: The dynamic powersave timeout (in ms), see the 1642 * powersave documentation below. This variable is valid only when 1643 * the CONF_PS flag is set. 1644 * 1645 * @power_level: requested transmit power (in dBm), backward compatibility 1646 * value only that is set to the minimum of all interfaces 1647 * 1648 * @chandef: the channel definition to tune to 1649 * @radar_enabled: whether radar detection is enabled 1650 * 1651 * @long_frame_max_tx_count: Maximum number of transmissions for a "long" frame 1652 * (a frame not RTS protected), called "dot11LongRetryLimit" in 802.11, 1653 * but actually means the number of transmissions not the number of retries 1654 * @short_frame_max_tx_count: Maximum number of transmissions for a "short" 1655 * frame, called "dot11ShortRetryLimit" in 802.11, but actually means the 1656 * number of transmissions not the number of retries 1657 * 1658 * @smps_mode: spatial multiplexing powersave mode; note that 1659 * %IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC is used when the device is not 1660 * configured for an HT channel. 1661 * Note that this is only valid if channel contexts are not used, 1662 * otherwise each channel context has the number of chains listed. 1663 */ 1664 struct ieee80211_conf { 1665 u32 flags; 1666 int power_level, dynamic_ps_timeout; 1667 1668 u16 listen_interval; 1669 u8 ps_dtim_period; 1670 1671 u8 long_frame_max_tx_count, short_frame_max_tx_count; 1672 1673 struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef; 1674 bool radar_enabled; 1675 enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode; 1676 }; 1677 1678 /** 1679 * struct ieee80211_channel_switch - holds the channel switch data 1680 * 1681 * The information provided in this structure is required for channel switch 1682 * operation. 1683 * 1684 * @timestamp: value in microseconds of the 64-bit Time Synchronization 1685 * Function (TSF) timer when the frame containing the channel switch 1686 * announcement was received. This is simply the rx.mactime parameter 1687 * the driver passed into mac80211. 1688 * @device_timestamp: arbitrary timestamp for the device, this is the 1689 * rx.device_timestamp parameter the driver passed to mac80211. 1690 * @block_tx: Indicates whether transmission must be blocked before the 1691 * scheduled channel switch, as indicated by the AP. 1692 * @chandef: the new channel to switch to 1693 * @count: the number of TBTT's until the channel switch event 1694 * @delay: maximum delay between the time the AP transmitted the last beacon in 1695 * current channel and the expected time of the first beacon in the new 1696 * channel, expressed in TU. 1697 */ 1698 struct ieee80211_channel_switch { 1699 u64 timestamp; 1700 u32 device_timestamp; 1701 bool block_tx; 1702 struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef; 1703 u8 count; 1704 u32 delay; 1705 }; 1706 1707 /** 1708 * enum ieee80211_vif_flags - virtual interface flags 1709 * 1710 * @IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER: the device performs beacon filtering 1711 * on this virtual interface to avoid unnecessary CPU wakeups 1712 * @IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI: the device can do connection quality 1713 * monitoring on this virtual interface -- i.e. it can monitor 1714 * connection quality related parameters, such as the RSSI level and 1715 * provide notifications if configured trigger levels are reached. 1716 * @IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD: The device can do U-APSD for this 1717 * interface. This flag should be set during interface addition, 1718 * but may be set/cleared as late as authentication to an AP. It is 1719 * only valid for managed/station mode interfaces. 1720 * @IEEE80211_VIF_GET_NOA_UPDATE: request to handle NOA attributes 1721 * and send P2P_PS notification to the driver if NOA changed, even 1722 * this is not pure P2P vif. 1723 */ 1724 enum ieee80211_vif_flags { 1725 IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER = BIT(0), 1726 IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI = BIT(1), 1727 IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD = BIT(2), 1728 IEEE80211_VIF_GET_NOA_UPDATE = BIT(3), 1729 }; 1730 1731 1732 /** 1733 * enum ieee80211_offload_flags - virtual interface offload flags 1734 * 1735 * @IEEE80211_OFFLOAD_ENCAP_ENABLED: tx encapsulation offload is enabled 1736 * The driver supports sending frames passed as 802.3 frames by mac80211. 1737 * It must also support sending 802.11 packets for the same interface. 1738 * @IEEE80211_OFFLOAD_ENCAP_4ADDR: support 4-address mode encapsulation offload 1739 * @IEEE80211_OFFLOAD_DECAP_ENABLED: rx encapsulation offload is enabled 1740 * The driver supports passing received 802.11 frames as 802.3 frames to 1741 * mac80211. 1742 */ 1743 1744 enum ieee80211_offload_flags { 1745 IEEE80211_OFFLOAD_ENCAP_ENABLED = BIT(0), 1746 IEEE80211_OFFLOAD_ENCAP_4ADDR = BIT(1), 1747 IEEE80211_OFFLOAD_DECAP_ENABLED = BIT(2), 1748 }; 1749 1750 /** 1751 * struct ieee80211_vif_cfg - interface configuration 1752 * @assoc: association status 1753 * @ibss_joined: indicates whether this station is part of an IBSS or not 1754 * @ibss_creator: indicates if a new IBSS network is being created 1755 * @ps: power-save mode (STA only). This flag is NOT affected by 1756 * offchannel/dynamic_ps operations. 1757 * @aid: association ID number, valid only when @assoc is true 1758 * @arp_addr_list: List of IPv4 addresses for hardware ARP filtering. The 1759 * may filter ARP queries targeted for other addresses than listed here. 1760 * The driver must allow ARP queries targeted for all address listed here 1761 * to pass through. An empty list implies no ARP queries need to pass. 1762 * @arp_addr_cnt: Number of addresses currently on the list. Note that this 1763 * may be larger than %IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN (the arp_addr_list 1764 * array size), it's up to the driver what to do in that case. 1765 * @ssid: The SSID of the current vif. Valid in AP and IBSS mode. 1766 * @ssid_len: Length of SSID given in @ssid. 1767 * @s1g: BSS is S1G BSS (affects Association Request format). 1768 * @idle: This interface is idle. There's also a global idle flag in the 1769 * hardware config which may be more appropriate depending on what 1770 * your driver/device needs to do. 1771 * @ap_addr: AP MLD address, or BSSID for non-MLO connections 1772 * (station mode only) 1773 */ 1774 struct ieee80211_vif_cfg { 1775 /* association related data */ 1776 bool assoc, ibss_joined; 1777 bool ibss_creator; 1778 bool ps; 1779 u16 aid; 1780 1781 __be32 arp_addr_list[IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN]; 1782 int arp_addr_cnt; 1783 u8 ssid[IEEE80211_MAX_SSID_LEN]; 1784 size_t ssid_len; 1785 bool s1g; 1786 bool idle; 1787 u8 ap_addr[ETH_ALEN] __aligned(2); 1788 }; 1789 1790 /** 1791 * struct ieee80211_vif - per-interface data 1792 * 1793 * Data in this structure is continually present for driver 1794 * use during the life of a virtual interface. 1795 * 1796 * @type: type of this virtual interface 1797 * @cfg: vif configuration, see &struct ieee80211_vif_cfg 1798 * @bss_conf: BSS configuration for this interface, either our own 1799 * or the BSS we're associated to 1800 * @link_conf: in case of MLD, the per-link BSS configuration, 1801 * indexed by link ID 1802 * @valid_links: bitmap of valid links, or 0 for non-MLO. 1803 * @active_links: The bitmap of active links, or 0 for non-MLO. 1804 * The driver shouldn't change this directly, but use the 1805 * API calls meant for that purpose. 1806 * @addr: address of this interface 1807 * @p2p: indicates whether this AP or STA interface is a p2p 1808 * interface, i.e. a GO or p2p-sta respectively 1809 * @driver_flags: flags/capabilities the driver has for this interface, 1810 * these need to be set (or cleared) when the interface is added 1811 * or, if supported by the driver, the interface type is changed 1812 * at runtime, mac80211 will never touch this field 1813 * @offload_flags: hardware offload capabilities/flags for this interface. 1814 * These are initialized by mac80211 before calling .add_interface, 1815 * .change_interface or .update_vif_offload and updated by the driver 1816 * within these ops, based on supported features or runtime change 1817 * restrictions. 1818 * @hw_queue: hardware queue for each AC 1819 * @cab_queue: content-after-beacon (DTIM beacon really) queue, AP mode only 1820 * @debugfs_dir: debugfs dentry, can be used by drivers to create own per 1821 * interface debug files. Note that it will be NULL for the virtual 1822 * monitor interface (if that is requested.) 1823 * @probe_req_reg: probe requests should be reported to mac80211 for this 1824 * interface. 1825 * @rx_mcast_action_reg: multicast Action frames should be reported to mac80211 1826 * for this interface. 1827 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to 1828 * sizeof(void \*). 1829 * @txq: the multicast data TX queue (if driver uses the TXQ abstraction) 1830 * @txqs_stopped: per AC flag to indicate that intermediate TXQs are stopped, 1831 * protected by fq->lock. 1832 * @offload_flags: 802.3 -> 802.11 enapsulation offload flags, see 1833 * &enum ieee80211_offload_flags. 1834 * @mbssid_tx_vif: Pointer to the transmitting interface if MBSSID is enabled. 1835 */ 1836 struct ieee80211_vif { 1837 enum nl80211_iftype type; 1838 struct ieee80211_vif_cfg cfg; 1839 struct ieee80211_bss_conf bss_conf; 1840 struct ieee80211_bss_conf __rcu *link_conf[IEEE80211_MLD_MAX_NUM_LINKS]; 1841 u16 valid_links, active_links; 1842 u8 addr[ETH_ALEN] __aligned(2); 1843 bool p2p; 1844 1845 u8 cab_queue; 1846 u8 hw_queue[IEEE80211_NUM_ACS]; 1847 1848 struct ieee80211_txq *txq; 1849 1850 u32 driver_flags; 1851 u32 offload_flags; 1852 1853 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS 1854 struct dentry *debugfs_dir; 1855 #endif 1856 1857 bool probe_req_reg; 1858 bool rx_mcast_action_reg; 1859 1860 bool txqs_stopped[IEEE80211_NUM_ACS]; 1861 1862 struct ieee80211_vif *mbssid_tx_vif; 1863 1864 /* must be last */ 1865 u8 drv_priv[] __aligned(sizeof(void *)); 1866 }; 1867 1868 #define for_each_vif_active_link(vif, link, link_id) \ 1869 for (link_id = 0; link_id < ARRAY_SIZE((vif)->link_conf); link_id++) \ 1870 if ((!(vif)->active_links || \ 1871 (vif)->active_links & BIT(link_id)) && \ 1872 (link = rcu_dereference((vif)->link_conf[link_id]))) 1873 1874 static inline bool ieee80211_vif_is_mesh(struct ieee80211_vif *vif) 1875 { 1876 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_MESH 1877 return vif->type == NL80211_IFTYPE_MESH_POINT; 1878 #endif 1879 return false; 1880 } 1881 1882 /** 1883 * wdev_to_ieee80211_vif - return a vif struct from a wdev 1884 * @wdev: the wdev to get the vif for 1885 * 1886 * This can be used by mac80211 drivers with direct cfg80211 APIs 1887 * (like the vendor commands) that get a wdev. 1888 * 1889 * Note that this function may return %NULL if the given wdev isn't 1890 * associated with a vif that the driver knows about (e.g. monitor 1891 * or AP_VLAN interfaces.) 1892 */ 1893 struct ieee80211_vif *wdev_to_ieee80211_vif(struct wireless_dev *wdev); 1894 1895 /** 1896 * ieee80211_vif_to_wdev - return a wdev struct from a vif 1897 * @vif: the vif to get the wdev for 1898 * 1899 * This can be used by mac80211 drivers with direct cfg80211 APIs 1900 * (like the vendor commands) that needs to get the wdev for a vif. 1901 * This can also be useful to get the netdev associated to a vif. 1902 */ 1903 struct wireless_dev *ieee80211_vif_to_wdev(struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 1904 1905 /** 1906 * lockdep_vif_mutex_held - for lockdep checks on link poiners 1907 * @vif: the interface to check 1908 */ 1909 static inline bool lockdep_vif_mutex_held(struct ieee80211_vif *vif) 1910 { 1911 return lockdep_is_held(&ieee80211_vif_to_wdev(vif)->mtx); 1912 } 1913 1914 #define link_conf_dereference_protected(vif, link_id) \ 1915 rcu_dereference_protected((vif)->link_conf[link_id], \ 1916 lockdep_vif_mutex_held(vif)) 1917 1918 /** 1919 * enum ieee80211_key_flags - key flags 1920 * 1921 * These flags are used for communication about keys between the driver 1922 * and mac80211, with the @flags parameter of &struct ieee80211_key_conf. 1923 * 1924 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV: This flag should be set by the 1925 * driver to indicate that it requires IV generation for this 1926 * particular key. Setting this flag does not necessarily mean that SKBs 1927 * will have sufficient tailroom for ICV or MIC. 1928 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC: This flag should be set by 1929 * the driver for a TKIP key if it requires Michael MIC 1930 * generation in software. 1931 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PAIRWISE: Set by mac80211, this flag indicates 1932 * that the key is pairwise rather then a shared key. 1933 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX: This flag should be set by the driver for a 1934 * CCMP/GCMP key if it requires CCMP/GCMP encryption of management frames 1935 * (MFP) to be done in software. 1936 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_IV_SPACE: This flag should be set by the driver 1937 * if space should be prepared for the IV, but the IV 1938 * itself should not be generated. Do not set together with 1939 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV on the same key. Setting this flag does 1940 * not necessarily mean that SKBs will have sufficient tailroom for ICV or 1941 * MIC. 1942 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RX_MGMT: This key will be used to decrypt received 1943 * management frames. The flag can help drivers that have a hardware 1944 * crypto implementation that doesn't deal with management frames 1945 * properly by allowing them to not upload the keys to hardware and 1946 * fall back to software crypto. Note that this flag deals only with 1947 * RX, if your crypto engine can't deal with TX you can also set the 1948 * %IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX flag to encrypt such frames in SW. 1949 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV_MGMT: This flag should be set by the 1950 * driver for a CCMP/GCMP key to indicate that is requires IV generation 1951 * only for management frames (MFP). 1952 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RESERVE_TAILROOM: This flag should be set by the 1953 * driver for a key to indicate that sufficient tailroom must always 1954 * be reserved for ICV or MIC, even when HW encryption is enabled. 1955 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_MIC_SPACE: This flag should be set by the driver for 1956 * a TKIP key if it only requires MIC space. Do not set together with 1957 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC on the same key. 1958 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_NO_AUTO_TX: Key needs explicit Tx activation. 1959 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIE: This flag should be set by the driver 1960 * for a AES_CMAC key to indicate that it requires sequence number 1961 * generation only 1962 */ 1963 enum ieee80211_key_flags { 1964 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV_MGMT = BIT(0), 1965 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV = BIT(1), 1966 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC = BIT(2), 1967 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PAIRWISE = BIT(3), 1968 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX = BIT(4), 1969 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_IV_SPACE = BIT(5), 1970 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RX_MGMT = BIT(6), 1971 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RESERVE_TAILROOM = BIT(7), 1972 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_MIC_SPACE = BIT(8), 1973 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_NO_AUTO_TX = BIT(9), 1974 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIE = BIT(10), 1975 }; 1976 1977 /** 1978 * struct ieee80211_key_conf - key information 1979 * 1980 * This key information is given by mac80211 to the driver by 1981 * the set_key() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops. 1982 * 1983 * @hw_key_idx: To be set by the driver, this is the key index the driver 1984 * wants to be given when a frame is transmitted and needs to be 1985 * encrypted in hardware. 1986 * @cipher: The key's cipher suite selector. 1987 * @tx_pn: PN used for TX keys, may be used by the driver as well if it 1988 * needs to do software PN assignment by itself (e.g. due to TSO) 1989 * @flags: key flags, see &enum ieee80211_key_flags. 1990 * @keyidx: the key index (0-3) 1991 * @keylen: key material length 1992 * @key: key material. For ALG_TKIP the key is encoded as a 256-bit (32 byte) 1993 * data block: 1994 * - Temporal Encryption Key (128 bits) 1995 * - Temporal Authenticator Tx MIC Key (64 bits) 1996 * - Temporal Authenticator Rx MIC Key (64 bits) 1997 * @icv_len: The ICV length for this key type 1998 * @iv_len: The IV length for this key type 1999 * @link_id: the link ID for MLO, or -1 for non-MLO or pairwise keys 2000 */ 2001 struct ieee80211_key_conf { 2002 atomic64_t tx_pn; 2003 u32 cipher; 2004 u8 icv_len; 2005 u8 iv_len; 2006 u8 hw_key_idx; 2007 s8 keyidx; 2008 u16 flags; 2009 s8 link_id; 2010 u8 keylen; 2011 u8 key[]; 2012 }; 2013 2014 #define IEEE80211_MAX_PN_LEN 16 2015 2016 #define TKIP_PN_TO_IV16(pn) ((u16)(pn & 0xffff)) 2017 #define TKIP_PN_TO_IV32(pn) ((u32)((pn >> 16) & 0xffffffff)) 2018 2019 /** 2020 * struct ieee80211_key_seq - key sequence counter 2021 * 2022 * @tkip: TKIP data, containing IV32 and IV16 in host byte order 2023 * @ccmp: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian, 2024 * reverse order than in packet) 2025 * @aes_cmac: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian, 2026 * reverse order than in packet) 2027 * @aes_gmac: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian, 2028 * reverse order than in packet) 2029 * @gcmp: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian, 2030 * reverse order than in packet) 2031 * @hw: data for HW-only (e.g. cipher scheme) keys 2032 */ 2033 struct ieee80211_key_seq { 2034 union { 2035 struct { 2036 u32 iv32; 2037 u16 iv16; 2038 } tkip; 2039 struct { 2040 u8 pn[6]; 2041 } ccmp; 2042 struct { 2043 u8 pn[6]; 2044 } aes_cmac; 2045 struct { 2046 u8 pn[6]; 2047 } aes_gmac; 2048 struct { 2049 u8 pn[6]; 2050 } gcmp; 2051 struct { 2052 u8 seq[IEEE80211_MAX_PN_LEN]; 2053 u8 seq_len; 2054 } hw; 2055 }; 2056 }; 2057 2058 /** 2059 * enum set_key_cmd - key command 2060 * 2061 * Used with the set_key() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops, this 2062 * indicates whether a key is being removed or added. 2063 * 2064 * @SET_KEY: a key is set 2065 * @DISABLE_KEY: a key must be disabled 2066 */ 2067 enum set_key_cmd { 2068 SET_KEY, DISABLE_KEY, 2069 }; 2070 2071 /** 2072 * enum ieee80211_sta_state - station state 2073 * 2074 * @IEEE80211_STA_NOTEXIST: station doesn't exist at all, 2075 * this is a special state for add/remove transitions 2076 * @IEEE80211_STA_NONE: station exists without special state 2077 * @IEEE80211_STA_AUTH: station is authenticated 2078 * @IEEE80211_STA_ASSOC: station is associated 2079 * @IEEE80211_STA_AUTHORIZED: station is authorized (802.1X) 2080 */ 2081 enum ieee80211_sta_state { 2082 /* NOTE: These need to be ordered correctly! */ 2083 IEEE80211_STA_NOTEXIST, 2084 IEEE80211_STA_NONE, 2085 IEEE80211_STA_AUTH, 2086 IEEE80211_STA_ASSOC, 2087 IEEE80211_STA_AUTHORIZED, 2088 }; 2089 2090 /** 2091 * enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth - station RX bandwidth 2092 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_20: station can only receive 20 MHz 2093 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_40: station can receive up to 40 MHz 2094 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_80: station can receive up to 80 MHz 2095 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_160: station can receive up to 160 MHz 2096 * (including 80+80 MHz) 2097 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_320: station can receive up to 320 MHz 2098 * 2099 * Implementation note: 20 must be zero to be initialized 2100 * correctly, the values must be sorted. 2101 */ 2102 enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth { 2103 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_20 = 0, 2104 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_40, 2105 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_80, 2106 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_160, 2107 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_320, 2108 }; 2109 2110 /** 2111 * struct ieee80211_sta_rates - station rate selection table 2112 * 2113 * @rcu_head: RCU head used for freeing the table on update 2114 * @rate: transmit rates/flags to be used by default. 2115 * Overriding entries per-packet is possible by using cb tx control. 2116 */ 2117 struct ieee80211_sta_rates { 2118 struct rcu_head rcu_head; 2119 struct { 2120 s8 idx; 2121 u8 count; 2122 u8 count_cts; 2123 u8 count_rts; 2124 u16 flags; 2125 } rate[IEEE80211_TX_RATE_TABLE_SIZE]; 2126 }; 2127 2128 /** 2129 * struct ieee80211_sta_txpwr - station txpower configuration 2130 * 2131 * Used to configure txpower for station. 2132 * 2133 * @power: indicates the tx power, in dBm, to be used when sending data frames 2134 * to the STA. 2135 * @type: In particular if TPC %type is NL80211_TX_POWER_LIMITED then tx power 2136 * will be less than or equal to specified from userspace, whereas if TPC 2137 * %type is NL80211_TX_POWER_AUTOMATIC then it indicates default tx power. 2138 * NL80211_TX_POWER_FIXED is not a valid configuration option for 2139 * per peer TPC. 2140 */ 2141 struct ieee80211_sta_txpwr { 2142 s16 power; 2143 enum nl80211_tx_power_setting type; 2144 }; 2145 2146 /** 2147 * struct ieee80211_sta_aggregates - info that is aggregated from active links 2148 * 2149 * Used for any per-link data that needs to be aggregated and updated in the 2150 * main &struct ieee80211_sta when updated or the active links change. 2151 * 2152 * @max_amsdu_len: indicates the maximal length of an A-MSDU in bytes. 2153 * This field is always valid for packets with a VHT preamble. 2154 * For packets with a HT preamble, additional limits apply: 2155 * 2156 * * If the skb is transmitted as part of a BA agreement, the 2157 * A-MSDU maximal size is min(max_amsdu_len, 4065) bytes. 2158 * * If the skb is not part of a BA agreement, the A-MSDU maximal 2159 * size is min(max_amsdu_len, 7935) bytes. 2160 * 2161 * Both additional HT limits must be enforced by the low level 2162 * driver. This is defined by the spec (IEEE 802.11-2012 section 2163 * 8.3.2.2 NOTE 2). 2164 * @max_rc_amsdu_len: Maximum A-MSDU size in bytes recommended by rate control. 2165 * @max_tid_amsdu_len: Maximum A-MSDU size in bytes for this TID 2166 */ 2167 struct ieee80211_sta_aggregates { 2168 u16 max_amsdu_len; 2169 2170 u16 max_rc_amsdu_len; 2171 u16 max_tid_amsdu_len[IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS]; 2172 }; 2173 2174 /** 2175 * struct ieee80211_link_sta - station Link specific info 2176 * All link specific info for a STA link for a non MLD STA(single) 2177 * or a MLD STA(multiple entries) are stored here. 2178 * 2179 * @addr: MAC address of the Link STA. For non-MLO STA this is same as the addr 2180 * in ieee80211_sta. For MLO Link STA this addr can be same or different 2181 * from addr in ieee80211_sta (representing MLD STA addr) 2182 * @link_id: the link ID for this link STA (0 for deflink) 2183 * @smps_mode: current SMPS mode (off, static or dynamic) 2184 * @supp_rates: Bitmap of supported rates 2185 * @ht_cap: HT capabilities of this STA; restricted to our own capabilities 2186 * @vht_cap: VHT capabilities of this STA; restricted to our own capabilities 2187 * @he_cap: HE capabilities of this STA 2188 * @he_6ghz_capa: on 6 GHz, holds the HE 6 GHz band capabilities 2189 * @eht_cap: EHT capabilities of this STA 2190 * @bandwidth: current bandwidth the station can receive with 2191 * @rx_nss: in HT/VHT, the maximum number of spatial streams the 2192 * station can receive at the moment, changed by operating mode 2193 * notifications and capabilities. The value is only valid after 2194 * the station moves to associated state. 2195 * @txpwr: the station tx power configuration 2196 * 2197 */ 2198 struct ieee80211_link_sta { 2199 u8 addr[ETH_ALEN]; 2200 u8 link_id; 2201 enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode; 2202 2203 u32 supp_rates[NUM_NL80211_BANDS]; 2204 struct ieee80211_sta_ht_cap ht_cap; 2205 struct ieee80211_sta_vht_cap vht_cap; 2206 struct ieee80211_sta_he_cap he_cap; 2207 struct ieee80211_he_6ghz_capa he_6ghz_capa; 2208 struct ieee80211_sta_eht_cap eht_cap; 2209 2210 struct ieee80211_sta_aggregates agg; 2211 2212 u8 rx_nss; 2213 enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth bandwidth; 2214 struct ieee80211_sta_txpwr txpwr; 2215 }; 2216 2217 /** 2218 * struct ieee80211_sta - station table entry 2219 * 2220 * A station table entry represents a station we are possibly 2221 * communicating with. Since stations are RCU-managed in 2222 * mac80211, any ieee80211_sta pointer you get access to must 2223 * either be protected by rcu_read_lock() explicitly or implicitly, 2224 * or you must take good care to not use such a pointer after a 2225 * call to your sta_remove callback that removed it. 2226 * This also represents the MLD STA in case of MLO association 2227 * and holds pointers to various link STA's 2228 * 2229 * @addr: MAC address 2230 * @aid: AID we assigned to the station if we're an AP 2231 * @max_rx_aggregation_subframes: maximal amount of frames in a single AMPDU 2232 * that this station is allowed to transmit to us. 2233 * Can be modified by driver. 2234 * @wme: indicates whether the STA supports QoS/WME (if local devices does, 2235 * otherwise always false) 2236 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to 2237 * sizeof(void \*), size is determined in hw information. 2238 * @uapsd_queues: bitmap of queues configured for uapsd. Only valid 2239 * if wme is supported. The bits order is like in 2240 * IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_AC_*. 2241 * @max_sp: max Service Period. Only valid if wme is supported. 2242 * @rates: rate control selection table 2243 * @tdls: indicates whether the STA is a TDLS peer 2244 * @tdls_initiator: indicates the STA is an initiator of the TDLS link. Only 2245 * valid if the STA is a TDLS peer in the first place. 2246 * @mfp: indicates whether the STA uses management frame protection or not. 2247 * @mlo: indicates whether the STA is MLO station. 2248 * @max_amsdu_subframes: indicates the maximal number of MSDUs in a single 2249 * A-MSDU. Taken from the Extended Capabilities element. 0 means 2250 * unlimited. 2251 * @cur: currently valid data as aggregated from the active links 2252 * For non MLO STA it will point to the deflink data. For MLO STA 2253 * ieee80211_sta_recalc_aggregates() must be called to update it. 2254 * @support_p2p_ps: indicates whether the STA supports P2P PS mechanism or not. 2255 * @txq: per-TID data TX queues (if driver uses the TXQ abstraction); note that 2256 * the last entry (%IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS) is used for non-data frames 2257 * @deflink: This holds the default link STA information, for non MLO STA all link 2258 * specific STA information is accessed through @deflink or through 2259 * link[0] which points to address of @deflink. For MLO Link STA 2260 * the first added link STA will point to deflink. 2261 * @link: reference to Link Sta entries. For Non MLO STA, except 1st link, 2262 * i.e link[0] all links would be assigned to NULL by default and 2263 * would access link information via @deflink or link[0]. For MLO 2264 * STA, first link STA being added will point its link pointer to 2265 * @deflink address and remaining would be allocated and the address 2266 * would be assigned to link[link_id] where link_id is the id assigned 2267 * by the AP. 2268 * @valid_links: bitmap of valid links, or 0 for non-MLO 2269 */ 2270 struct ieee80211_sta { 2271 u8 addr[ETH_ALEN]; 2272 u16 aid; 2273 u16 max_rx_aggregation_subframes; 2274 bool wme; 2275 u8 uapsd_queues; 2276 u8 max_sp; 2277 struct ieee80211_sta_rates __rcu *rates; 2278 bool tdls; 2279 bool tdls_initiator; 2280 bool mfp; 2281 bool mlo; 2282 u8 max_amsdu_subframes; 2283 2284 struct ieee80211_sta_aggregates *cur; 2285 2286 bool support_p2p_ps; 2287 2288 struct ieee80211_txq *txq[IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS + 1]; 2289 2290 u16 valid_links; 2291 struct ieee80211_link_sta deflink; 2292 struct ieee80211_link_sta __rcu *link[IEEE80211_MLD_MAX_NUM_LINKS]; 2293 2294 /* must be last */ 2295 u8 drv_priv[] __aligned(sizeof(void *)); 2296 }; 2297 2298 #ifdef CONFIG_LOCKDEP 2299 bool lockdep_sta_mutex_held(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta); 2300 #else 2301 static inline bool lockdep_sta_mutex_held(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta) 2302 { 2303 return true; 2304 } 2305 #endif 2306 2307 #define link_sta_dereference_protected(sta, link_id) \ 2308 rcu_dereference_protected((sta)->link[link_id], \ 2309 lockdep_sta_mutex_held(sta)) 2310 2311 #define for_each_sta_active_link(vif, sta, link_sta, link_id) \ 2312 for (link_id = 0; link_id < ARRAY_SIZE((sta)->link); link_id++) \ 2313 if ((!(vif)->active_links || \ 2314 (vif)->active_links & BIT(link_id)) && \ 2315 ((link_sta) = link_sta_dereference_protected(sta, link_id))) 2316 2317 /** 2318 * enum sta_notify_cmd - sta notify command 2319 * 2320 * Used with the sta_notify() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops, this 2321 * indicates if an associated station made a power state transition. 2322 * 2323 * @STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP: a station is now sleeping 2324 * @STA_NOTIFY_AWAKE: a sleeping station woke up 2325 */ 2326 enum sta_notify_cmd { 2327 STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP, STA_NOTIFY_AWAKE, 2328 }; 2329 2330 /** 2331 * struct ieee80211_tx_control - TX control data 2332 * 2333 * @sta: station table entry, this sta pointer may be NULL and 2334 * it is not allowed to copy the pointer, due to RCU. 2335 */ 2336 struct ieee80211_tx_control { 2337 struct ieee80211_sta *sta; 2338 }; 2339 2340 /** 2341 * struct ieee80211_txq - Software intermediate tx queue 2342 * 2343 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 2344 * @sta: station table entry, %NULL for per-vif queue 2345 * @tid: the TID for this queue (unused for per-vif queue), 2346 * %IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS for non-data (if enabled) 2347 * @ac: the AC for this queue 2348 * @drv_priv: driver private area, sized by hw->txq_data_size 2349 * 2350 * The driver can obtain packets from this queue by calling 2351 * ieee80211_tx_dequeue(). 2352 */ 2353 struct ieee80211_txq { 2354 struct ieee80211_vif *vif; 2355 struct ieee80211_sta *sta; 2356 u8 tid; 2357 u8 ac; 2358 2359 /* must be last */ 2360 u8 drv_priv[] __aligned(sizeof(void *)); 2361 }; 2362 2363 /** 2364 * enum ieee80211_hw_flags - hardware flags 2365 * 2366 * These flags are used to indicate hardware capabilities to 2367 * the stack. Generally, flags here should have their meaning 2368 * done in a way that the simplest hardware doesn't need setting 2369 * any particular flags. There are some exceptions to this rule, 2370 * however, so you are advised to review these flags carefully. 2371 * 2372 * @IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL: 2373 * The hardware or firmware includes rate control, and cannot be 2374 * controlled by the stack. As such, no rate control algorithm 2375 * should be instantiated, and the TX rate reported to userspace 2376 * will be taken from the TX status instead of the rate control 2377 * algorithm. 2378 * Note that this requires that the driver implement a number of 2379 * callbacks so it has the correct information, it needs to have 2380 * the @set_rts_threshold callback and must look at the BSS config 2381 * @use_cts_prot for G/N protection, @use_short_slot for slot 2382 * timing in 2.4 GHz and @use_short_preamble for preambles for 2383 * CCK frames. 2384 * 2385 * @IEEE80211_HW_RX_INCLUDES_FCS: 2386 * Indicates that received frames passed to the stack include 2387 * the FCS at the end. 2388 * 2389 * @IEEE80211_HW_HOST_BROADCAST_PS_BUFFERING: 2390 * Some wireless LAN chipsets buffer broadcast/multicast frames 2391 * for power saving stations in the hardware/firmware and others 2392 * rely on the host system for such buffering. This option is used 2393 * to configure the IEEE 802.11 upper layer to buffer broadcast and 2394 * multicast frames when there are power saving stations so that 2395 * the driver can fetch them with ieee80211_get_buffered_bc(). 2396 * 2397 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC: 2398 * Hardware can provide signal values but we don't know its units. We 2399 * expect values between 0 and @max_signal. 2400 * If possible please provide dB or dBm instead. 2401 * 2402 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DBM: 2403 * Hardware gives signal values in dBm, decibel difference from 2404 * one milliwatt. This is the preferred method since it is standardized 2405 * between different devices. @max_signal does not need to be set. 2406 * 2407 * @IEEE80211_HW_SPECTRUM_MGMT: 2408 * Hardware supports spectrum management defined in 802.11h 2409 * Measurement, Channel Switch, Quieting, TPC 2410 * 2411 * @IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_AGGREGATION: 2412 * Hardware supports 11n A-MPDU aggregation. 2413 * 2414 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS: 2415 * Hardware has power save support (i.e. can go to sleep). 2416 * 2417 * @IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK: 2418 * Hardware requires nullfunc frame handling in stack, implies 2419 * stack support for dynamic PS. 2420 * 2421 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS: 2422 * Hardware has support for dynamic PS. 2423 * 2424 * @IEEE80211_HW_MFP_CAPABLE: 2425 * Hardware supports management frame protection (MFP, IEEE 802.11w). 2426 * 2427 * @IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_TX_ACK_STATUS: 2428 * Hardware can provide ack status reports of Tx frames to 2429 * the stack. 2430 * 2431 * @IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR: 2432 * The hardware performs its own connection monitoring, including 2433 * periodic keep-alives to the AP and probing the AP on beacon loss. 2434 * 2435 * @IEEE80211_HW_NEED_DTIM_BEFORE_ASSOC: 2436 * This device needs to get data from beacon before association (i.e. 2437 * dtim_period). 2438 * 2439 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PER_STA_GTK: The device's crypto engine supports 2440 * per-station GTKs as used by IBSS RSN or during fast transition. If 2441 * the device doesn't support per-station GTKs, but can be asked not 2442 * to decrypt group addressed frames, then IBSS RSN support is still 2443 * possible but software crypto will be used. Advertise the wiphy flag 2444 * only in that case. 2445 * 2446 * @IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS: When operating in AP mode the device 2447 * autonomously manages the PS status of connected stations. When 2448 * this flag is set mac80211 will not trigger PS mode for connected 2449 * stations based on the PM bit of incoming frames. 2450 * Use ieee80211_start_ps()/ieee8021_end_ps() to manually configure 2451 * the PS mode of connected stations. 2452 * 2453 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMPDU_SETUP_IN_HW: The device handles TX A-MPDU session 2454 * setup strictly in HW. mac80211 should not attempt to do this in 2455 * software. 2456 * 2457 * @IEEE80211_HW_WANT_MONITOR_VIF: The driver would like to be informed of 2458 * a virtual monitor interface when monitor interfaces are the only 2459 * active interfaces. 2460 * 2461 * @IEEE80211_HW_NO_AUTO_VIF: The driver would like for no wlanX to 2462 * be created. It is expected user-space will create vifs as 2463 * desired (and thus have them named as desired). 2464 * 2465 * @IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL: The driver wants to control which of the 2466 * crypto algorithms can be done in software - so don't automatically 2467 * try to fall back to it if hardware crypto fails, but do so only if 2468 * the driver returns 1. This also forces the driver to advertise its 2469 * supported cipher suites. 2470 * 2471 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORT_FAST_XMIT: The driver/hardware supports fast-xmit, 2472 * this currently requires only the ability to calculate the duration 2473 * for frames. 2474 * 2475 * @IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL: The driver wants to control per-interface 2476 * queue mapping in order to use different queues (not just one per AC) 2477 * for different virtual interfaces. See the doc section on HW queue 2478 * control for more details. 2479 * 2480 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RC_TABLE: The driver supports using a rate 2481 * selection table provided by the rate control algorithm. 2482 * 2483 * @IEEE80211_HW_P2P_DEV_ADDR_FOR_INTF: Use the P2P Device address for any 2484 * P2P Interface. This will be honoured even if more than one interface 2485 * is supported. 2486 * 2487 * @IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY: Use sync timing from beacon frames 2488 * only, to allow getting TBTT of a DTIM beacon. 2489 * 2490 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_HT_CCK_RATES: Hardware supports mixing HT/CCK rates 2491 * and can cope with CCK rates in an aggregation session (e.g. by not 2492 * using aggregation for such frames.) 2493 * 2494 * @IEEE80211_HW_CHANCTX_STA_CSA: Support 802.11h based channel-switch (CSA) 2495 * for a single active channel while using channel contexts. When support 2496 * is not enabled the default action is to disconnect when getting the 2497 * CSA frame. 2498 * 2499 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CLONED_SKBS: The driver will never modify the payload 2500 * or tailroom of TX skbs without copying them first. 2501 * 2502 * @IEEE80211_HW_SINGLE_SCAN_ON_ALL_BANDS: The HW supports scanning on all bands 2503 * in one command, mac80211 doesn't have to run separate scans per band. 2504 * 2505 * @IEEE80211_HW_TDLS_WIDER_BW: The device/driver supports wider bandwidth 2506 * than then BSS bandwidth for a TDLS link on the base channel. 2507 * 2508 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_AMSDU_IN_AMPDU: The driver supports receiving A-MSDUs 2509 * within A-MPDU. 2510 * 2511 * @IEEE80211_HW_BEACON_TX_STATUS: The device/driver provides TX status 2512 * for sent beacons. 2513 * 2514 * @IEEE80211_HW_NEEDS_UNIQUE_STA_ADDR: Hardware (or driver) requires that each 2515 * station has a unique address, i.e. each station entry can be identified 2516 * by just its MAC address; this prevents, for example, the same station 2517 * from connecting to two virtual AP interfaces at the same time. 2518 * 2519 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_REORDERING_BUFFER: Hardware (or driver) manages the 2520 * reordering buffer internally, guaranteeing mac80211 receives frames in 2521 * order and does not need to manage its own reorder buffer or BA session 2522 * timeout. 2523 * 2524 * @IEEE80211_HW_USES_RSS: The device uses RSS and thus requires parallel RX, 2525 * which implies using per-CPU station statistics. 2526 * 2527 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMSDU: Hardware (or driver) supports software aggregated 2528 * A-MSDU frames. Requires software tx queueing and fast-xmit support. 2529 * When not using minstrel/minstrel_ht rate control, the driver must 2530 * limit the maximum A-MSDU size based on the current tx rate by setting 2531 * max_rc_amsdu_len in struct ieee80211_sta. 2532 * 2533 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_FRAG_LIST: Hardware (or driver) supports sending frag_list 2534 * skbs, needed for zero-copy software A-MSDU. 2535 * 2536 * @IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_LOW_ACK: The driver (or firmware) reports low ack event 2537 * by ieee80211_report_low_ack() based on its own algorithm. For such 2538 * drivers, mac80211 packet loss mechanism will not be triggered and driver 2539 * is completely depending on firmware event for station kickout. 2540 * 2541 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_FRAG: Hardware does fragmentation by itself. 2542 * The stack will not do fragmentation. 2543 * The callback for @set_frag_threshold should be set as well. 2544 * 2545 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TDLS_BUFFER_STA: Hardware supports buffer STA on 2546 * TDLS links. 2547 * 2548 * @IEEE80211_HW_DEAUTH_NEED_MGD_TX_PREP: The driver requires the 2549 * mgd_prepare_tx() callback to be called before transmission of a 2550 * deauthentication frame in case the association was completed but no 2551 * beacon was heard. This is required in multi-channel scenarios, where the 2552 * virtual interface might not be given air time for the transmission of 2553 * the frame, as it is not synced with the AP/P2P GO yet, and thus the 2554 * deauthentication frame might not be transmitted. 2555 * 2556 * @IEEE80211_HW_DOESNT_SUPPORT_QOS_NDP: The driver (or firmware) doesn't 2557 * support QoS NDP for AP probing - that's most likely a driver bug. 2558 * 2559 * @IEEE80211_HW_BUFF_MMPDU_TXQ: use the TXQ for bufferable MMPDUs, this of 2560 * course requires the driver to use TXQs to start with. 2561 * 2562 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW: (Hardware) rate control supports VHT 2563 * extended NSS BW (dot11VHTExtendedNSSBWCapable). This flag will be set if 2564 * the selected rate control algorithm sets %RATE_CTRL_CAPA_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW 2565 * but if the rate control is built-in then it must be set by the driver. 2566 * See also the documentation for that flag. 2567 * 2568 * @IEEE80211_HW_STA_MMPDU_TXQ: use the extra non-TID per-station TXQ for all 2569 * MMPDUs on station interfaces. This of course requires the driver to use 2570 * TXQs to start with. 2571 * 2572 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_STATUS_NO_AMPDU_LEN: Driver does not report accurate A-MPDU 2573 * length in tx status information 2574 * 2575 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_MULTI_BSSID: Hardware supports multi BSSID 2576 * 2577 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_ONLY_HE_MULTI_BSSID: Hardware supports multi BSSID 2578 * only for HE APs. Applies if @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_MULTI_BSSID is set. 2579 * 2580 * @IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_KEYBORDER_SUPPORT: The card and driver is only 2581 * aggregating MPDUs with the same keyid, allowing mac80211 to keep Tx 2582 * A-MPDU sessions active while rekeying with Extended Key ID. 2583 * 2584 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_ENCAP_OFFLOAD: Hardware supports tx encapsulation 2585 * offload 2586 * 2587 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RX_DECAP_OFFLOAD: Hardware supports rx decapsulation 2588 * offload 2589 * 2590 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CONC_MON_RX_DECAP: Hardware supports concurrent rx 2591 * decapsulation offload and passing raw 802.11 frames for monitor iface. 2592 * If this is supported, the driver must pass both 802.3 frames for real 2593 * usage and 802.11 frames with %RX_FLAG_ONLY_MONITOR set for monitor to 2594 * the stack. 2595 * 2596 * @IEEE80211_HW_DETECTS_COLOR_COLLISION: HW/driver has support for BSS color 2597 * collision detection and doesn't need it in software. 2598 * 2599 * @IEEE80211_HW_MLO_MCAST_MULTI_LINK_TX: Hardware/driver handles transmitting 2600 * multicast frames on all links, mac80211 should not do that. 2601 * 2602 * @NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS: number of hardware flags, used for sizing arrays 2603 */ 2604 enum ieee80211_hw_flags { 2605 IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL, 2606 IEEE80211_HW_RX_INCLUDES_FCS, 2607 IEEE80211_HW_HOST_BROADCAST_PS_BUFFERING, 2608 IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC, 2609 IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DBM, 2610 IEEE80211_HW_NEED_DTIM_BEFORE_ASSOC, 2611 IEEE80211_HW_SPECTRUM_MGMT, 2612 IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_AGGREGATION, 2613 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS, 2614 IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK, 2615 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS, 2616 IEEE80211_HW_MFP_CAPABLE, 2617 IEEE80211_HW_WANT_MONITOR_VIF, 2618 IEEE80211_HW_NO_AUTO_VIF, 2619 IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL, 2620 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORT_FAST_XMIT, 2621 IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_TX_ACK_STATUS, 2622 IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR, 2623 IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL, 2624 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PER_STA_GTK, 2625 IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS, 2626 IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMPDU_SETUP_IN_HW, 2627 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RC_TABLE, 2628 IEEE80211_HW_P2P_DEV_ADDR_FOR_INTF, 2629 IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY, 2630 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_HT_CCK_RATES, 2631 IEEE80211_HW_CHANCTX_STA_CSA, 2632 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CLONED_SKBS, 2633 IEEE80211_HW_SINGLE_SCAN_ON_ALL_BANDS, 2634 IEEE80211_HW_TDLS_WIDER_BW, 2635 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_AMSDU_IN_AMPDU, 2636 IEEE80211_HW_BEACON_TX_STATUS, 2637 IEEE80211_HW_NEEDS_UNIQUE_STA_ADDR, 2638 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_REORDERING_BUFFER, 2639 IEEE80211_HW_USES_RSS, 2640 IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMSDU, 2641 IEEE80211_HW_TX_FRAG_LIST, 2642 IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_LOW_ACK, 2643 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_FRAG, 2644 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TDLS_BUFFER_STA, 2645 IEEE80211_HW_DEAUTH_NEED_MGD_TX_PREP, 2646 IEEE80211_HW_DOESNT_SUPPORT_QOS_NDP, 2647 IEEE80211_HW_BUFF_MMPDU_TXQ, 2648 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW, 2649 IEEE80211_HW_STA_MMPDU_TXQ, 2650 IEEE80211_HW_TX_STATUS_NO_AMPDU_LEN, 2651 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_MULTI_BSSID, 2652 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_ONLY_HE_MULTI_BSSID, 2653 IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_KEYBORDER_SUPPORT, 2654 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_ENCAP_OFFLOAD, 2655 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RX_DECAP_OFFLOAD, 2656 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CONC_MON_RX_DECAP, 2657 IEEE80211_HW_DETECTS_COLOR_COLLISION, 2658 IEEE80211_HW_MLO_MCAST_MULTI_LINK_TX, 2659 2660 /* keep last, obviously */ 2661 NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS 2662 }; 2663 2664 /** 2665 * struct ieee80211_hw - hardware information and state 2666 * 2667 * This structure contains the configuration and hardware 2668 * information for an 802.11 PHY. 2669 * 2670 * @wiphy: This points to the &struct wiphy allocated for this 2671 * 802.11 PHY. You must fill in the @perm_addr and @dev 2672 * members of this structure using SET_IEEE80211_DEV() 2673 * and SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR(). Additionally, all supported 2674 * bands (with channels, bitrates) are registered here. 2675 * 2676 * @conf: &struct ieee80211_conf, device configuration, don't use. 2677 * 2678 * @priv: pointer to private area that was allocated for driver use 2679 * along with this structure. 2680 * 2681 * @flags: hardware flags, see &enum ieee80211_hw_flags. 2682 * 2683 * @extra_tx_headroom: headroom to reserve in each transmit skb 2684 * for use by the driver (e.g. for transmit headers.) 2685 * 2686 * @extra_beacon_tailroom: tailroom to reserve in each beacon tx skb. 2687 * Can be used by drivers to add extra IEs. 2688 * 2689 * @max_signal: Maximum value for signal (rssi) in RX information, used 2690 * only when @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC or @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DB 2691 * 2692 * @max_listen_interval: max listen interval in units of beacon interval 2693 * that HW supports 2694 * 2695 * @queues: number of available hardware transmit queues for 2696 * data packets. WMM/QoS requires at least four, these 2697 * queues need to have configurable access parameters. 2698 * 2699 * @rate_control_algorithm: rate control algorithm for this hardware. 2700 * If unset (NULL), the default algorithm will be used. Must be 2701 * set before calling ieee80211_register_hw(). 2702 * 2703 * @vif_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area 2704 * within &struct ieee80211_vif. 2705 * @sta_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area 2706 * within &struct ieee80211_sta. 2707 * @chanctx_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area 2708 * within &struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf. 2709 * @txq_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area 2710 * within @struct ieee80211_txq. 2711 * 2712 * @max_rates: maximum number of alternate rate retry stages the hw 2713 * can handle. 2714 * @max_report_rates: maximum number of alternate rate retry stages 2715 * the hw can report back. 2716 * @max_rate_tries: maximum number of tries for each stage 2717 * 2718 * @max_rx_aggregation_subframes: maximum buffer size (number of 2719 * sub-frames) to be used for A-MPDU block ack receiver 2720 * aggregation. 2721 * This is only relevant if the device has restrictions on the 2722 * number of subframes, if it relies on mac80211 to do reordering 2723 * it shouldn't be set. 2724 * 2725 * @max_tx_aggregation_subframes: maximum number of subframes in an 2726 * aggregate an HT/HE device will transmit. In HT AddBA we'll 2727 * advertise a constant value of 64 as some older APs crash if 2728 * the window size is smaller (an example is LinkSys WRT120N 2729 * with FW v1.0.07 build 002 Jun 18 2012). 2730 * For AddBA to HE capable peers this value will be used. 2731 * 2732 * @max_tx_fragments: maximum number of tx buffers per (A)-MSDU, sum 2733 * of 1 + skb_shinfo(skb)->nr_frags for each skb in the frag_list. 2734 * 2735 * @offchannel_tx_hw_queue: HW queue ID to use for offchannel TX 2736 * (if %IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL is set) 2737 * 2738 * @radiotap_mcs_details: lists which MCS information can the HW 2739 * reports, by default it is set to _MCS, _GI and _BW but doesn't 2740 * include _FMT. Use %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_MCS_HAVE_\* values, only 2741 * adding _BW is supported today. 2742 * 2743 * @radiotap_vht_details: lists which VHT MCS information the HW reports, 2744 * the default is _GI | _BANDWIDTH. 2745 * Use the %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_VHT_KNOWN_\* values. 2746 * 2747 * @radiotap_he: HE radiotap validity flags 2748 * 2749 * @radiotap_timestamp: Information for the radiotap timestamp field; if the 2750 * @units_pos member is set to a non-negative value then the timestamp 2751 * field will be added and populated from the &struct ieee80211_rx_status 2752 * device_timestamp. 2753 * @radiotap_timestamp.units_pos: Must be set to a combination of a 2754 * IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_TIMESTAMP_UNIT_* and a 2755 * IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_TIMESTAMP_SPOS_* value. 2756 * @radiotap_timestamp.accuracy: If non-negative, fills the accuracy in the 2757 * radiotap field and the accuracy known flag will be set. 2758 * 2759 * @netdev_features: netdev features to be set in each netdev created 2760 * from this HW. Note that not all features are usable with mac80211, 2761 * other features will be rejected during HW registration. 2762 * 2763 * @uapsd_queues: This bitmap is included in (re)association frame to indicate 2764 * for each access category if it is uAPSD trigger-enabled and delivery- 2765 * enabled. Use IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_AC_* to set this bitmap. 2766 * Each bit corresponds to different AC. Value '1' in specific bit means 2767 * that corresponding AC is both trigger- and delivery-enabled. '0' means 2768 * neither enabled. 2769 * 2770 * @uapsd_max_sp_len: maximum number of total buffered frames the WMM AP may 2771 * deliver to a WMM STA during any Service Period triggered by the WMM STA. 2772 * Use IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_SP_* for correct values. 2773 * 2774 * @max_nan_de_entries: maximum number of NAN DE functions supported by the 2775 * device. 2776 * 2777 * @tx_sk_pacing_shift: Pacing shift to set on TCP sockets when frames from 2778 * them are encountered. The default should typically not be changed, 2779 * unless the driver has good reasons for needing more buffers. 2780 * 2781 * @weight_multiplier: Driver specific airtime weight multiplier used while 2782 * refilling deficit of each TXQ. 2783 * 2784 * @max_mtu: the max mtu could be set. 2785 * 2786 * @tx_power_levels: a list of power levels supported by the wifi hardware. 2787 * The power levels can be specified either as integer or fractions. 2788 * The power level at idx 0 shall be the maximum positive power level. 2789 * 2790 * @max_txpwr_levels_idx: the maximum valid idx of 'tx_power_levels' list. 2791 */ 2792 struct ieee80211_hw { 2793 struct ieee80211_conf conf; 2794 struct wiphy *wiphy; 2795 const char *rate_control_algorithm; 2796 void *priv; 2797 unsigned long flags[BITS_TO_LONGS(NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS)]; 2798 unsigned int extra_tx_headroom; 2799 unsigned int extra_beacon_tailroom; 2800 int vif_data_size; 2801 int sta_data_size; 2802 int chanctx_data_size; 2803 int txq_data_size; 2804 u16 queues; 2805 u16 max_listen_interval; 2806 s8 max_signal; 2807 u8 max_rates; 2808 u8 max_report_rates; 2809 u8 max_rate_tries; 2810 u16 max_rx_aggregation_subframes; 2811 u16 max_tx_aggregation_subframes; 2812 u8 max_tx_fragments; 2813 u8 offchannel_tx_hw_queue; 2814 u8 radiotap_mcs_details; 2815 u16 radiotap_vht_details; 2816 struct { 2817 int units_pos; 2818 s16 accuracy; 2819 } radiotap_timestamp; 2820 netdev_features_t netdev_features; 2821 u8 uapsd_queues; 2822 u8 uapsd_max_sp_len; 2823 u8 max_nan_de_entries; 2824 u8 tx_sk_pacing_shift; 2825 u8 weight_multiplier; 2826 u32 max_mtu; 2827 const s8 *tx_power_levels; 2828 u8 max_txpwr_levels_idx; 2829 }; 2830 2831 static inline bool _ieee80211_hw_check(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 2832 enum ieee80211_hw_flags flg) 2833 { 2834 return test_bit(flg, hw->flags); 2835 } 2836 #define ieee80211_hw_check(hw, flg) _ieee80211_hw_check(hw, IEEE80211_HW_##flg) 2837 2838 static inline void _ieee80211_hw_set(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 2839 enum ieee80211_hw_flags flg) 2840 { 2841 return __set_bit(flg, hw->flags); 2842 } 2843 #define ieee80211_hw_set(hw, flg) _ieee80211_hw_set(hw, IEEE80211_HW_##flg) 2844 2845 /** 2846 * struct ieee80211_scan_request - hw scan request 2847 * 2848 * @ies: pointers different parts of IEs (in req.ie) 2849 * @req: cfg80211 request. 2850 */ 2851 struct ieee80211_scan_request { 2852 struct ieee80211_scan_ies ies; 2853 2854 /* Keep last */ 2855 struct cfg80211_scan_request req; 2856 }; 2857 2858 /** 2859 * struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params - TDLS channel switch parameters 2860 * 2861 * @sta: peer this TDLS channel-switch request/response came from 2862 * @chandef: channel referenced in a TDLS channel-switch request 2863 * @action_code: see &enum ieee80211_tdls_actioncode 2864 * @status: channel-switch response status 2865 * @timestamp: time at which the frame was received 2866 * @switch_time: switch-timing parameter received in the frame 2867 * @switch_timeout: switch-timing parameter received in the frame 2868 * @tmpl_skb: TDLS switch-channel response template 2869 * @ch_sw_tm_ie: offset of the channel-switch timing IE inside @tmpl_skb 2870 */ 2871 struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params { 2872 struct ieee80211_sta *sta; 2873 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef; 2874 u8 action_code; 2875 u32 status; 2876 u32 timestamp; 2877 u16 switch_time; 2878 u16 switch_timeout; 2879 struct sk_buff *tmpl_skb; 2880 u32 ch_sw_tm_ie; 2881 }; 2882 2883 /** 2884 * wiphy_to_ieee80211_hw - return a mac80211 driver hw struct from a wiphy 2885 * 2886 * @wiphy: the &struct wiphy which we want to query 2887 * 2888 * mac80211 drivers can use this to get to their respective 2889 * &struct ieee80211_hw. Drivers wishing to get to their own private 2890 * structure can then access it via hw->priv. Note that mac802111 drivers should 2891 * not use wiphy_priv() to try to get their private driver structure as this 2892 * is already used internally by mac80211. 2893 * 2894 * Return: The mac80211 driver hw struct of @wiphy. 2895 */ 2896 struct ieee80211_hw *wiphy_to_ieee80211_hw(struct wiphy *wiphy); 2897 2898 /** 2899 * SET_IEEE80211_DEV - set device for 802.11 hardware 2900 * 2901 * @hw: the &struct ieee80211_hw to set the device for 2902 * @dev: the &struct device of this 802.11 device 2903 */ 2904 static inline void SET_IEEE80211_DEV(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct device *dev) 2905 { 2906 set_wiphy_dev(hw->wiphy, dev); 2907 } 2908 2909 /** 2910 * SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR - set the permanent MAC address for 802.11 hardware 2911 * 2912 * @hw: the &struct ieee80211_hw to set the MAC address for 2913 * @addr: the address to set 2914 */ 2915 static inline void SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, const u8 *addr) 2916 { 2917 memcpy(hw->wiphy->perm_addr, addr, ETH_ALEN); 2918 } 2919 2920 static inline struct ieee80211_rate * 2921 ieee80211_get_tx_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 2922 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c) 2923 { 2924 if (WARN_ON_ONCE(c->control.rates[0].idx < 0)) 2925 return NULL; 2926 return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rates[0].idx]; 2927 } 2928 2929 static inline struct ieee80211_rate * 2930 ieee80211_get_rts_cts_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 2931 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c) 2932 { 2933 if (c->control.rts_cts_rate_idx < 0) 2934 return NULL; 2935 return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rts_cts_rate_idx]; 2936 } 2937 2938 static inline struct ieee80211_rate * 2939 ieee80211_get_alt_retry_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 2940 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c, int idx) 2941 { 2942 if (c->control.rates[idx + 1].idx < 0) 2943 return NULL; 2944 return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rates[idx + 1].idx]; 2945 } 2946 2947 /** 2948 * ieee80211_free_txskb - free TX skb 2949 * @hw: the hardware 2950 * @skb: the skb 2951 * 2952 * Free a transmit skb. Use this function when some failure 2953 * to transmit happened and thus status cannot be reported. 2954 */ 2955 void ieee80211_free_txskb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb); 2956 2957 /** 2958 * DOC: Hardware crypto acceleration 2959 * 2960 * mac80211 is capable of taking advantage of many hardware 2961 * acceleration designs for encryption and decryption operations. 2962 * 2963 * The set_key() callback in the &struct ieee80211_ops for a given 2964 * device is called to enable hardware acceleration of encryption and 2965 * decryption. The callback takes a @sta parameter that will be NULL 2966 * for default keys or keys used for transmission only, or point to 2967 * the station information for the peer for individual keys. 2968 * Multiple transmission keys with the same key index may be used when 2969 * VLANs are configured for an access point. 2970 * 2971 * When transmitting, the TX control data will use the @hw_key_idx 2972 * selected by the driver by modifying the &struct ieee80211_key_conf 2973 * pointed to by the @key parameter to the set_key() function. 2974 * 2975 * The set_key() call for the %SET_KEY command should return 0 if 2976 * the key is now in use, -%EOPNOTSUPP or -%ENOSPC if it couldn't be 2977 * added; if you return 0 then hw_key_idx must be assigned to the 2978 * hardware key index, you are free to use the full u8 range. 2979 * 2980 * Note that in the case that the @IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL flag is 2981 * set, mac80211 will not automatically fall back to software crypto if 2982 * enabling hardware crypto failed. The set_key() call may also return the 2983 * value 1 to permit this specific key/algorithm to be done in software. 2984 * 2985 * When the cmd is %DISABLE_KEY then it must succeed. 2986 * 2987 * Note that it is permissible to not decrypt a frame even if a key 2988 * for it has been uploaded to hardware, the stack will not make any 2989 * decision based on whether a key has been uploaded or not but rather 2990 * based on the receive flags. 2991 * 2992 * The &struct ieee80211_key_conf structure pointed to by the @key 2993 * parameter is guaranteed to be valid until another call to set_key() 2994 * removes it, but it can only be used as a cookie to differentiate 2995 * keys. 2996 * 2997 * In TKIP some HW need to be provided a phase 1 key, for RX decryption 2998 * acceleration (i.e. iwlwifi). Those drivers should provide update_tkip_key 2999 * handler. 3000 * The update_tkip_key() call updates the driver with the new phase 1 key. 3001 * This happens every time the iv16 wraps around (every 65536 packets). The 3002 * set_key() call will happen only once for each key (unless the AP did 3003 * rekeying), it will not include a valid phase 1 key. The valid phase 1 key is 3004 * provided by update_tkip_key only. The trigger that makes mac80211 call this 3005 * handler is software decryption with wrap around of iv16. 3006 * 3007 * The set_default_unicast_key() call updates the default WEP key index 3008 * configured to the hardware for WEP encryption type. This is required 3009 * for devices that support offload of data packets (e.g. ARP responses). 3010 * 3011 * Mac80211 drivers should set the @NL80211_EXT_FEATURE_CAN_REPLACE_PTK0 flag 3012 * when they are able to replace in-use PTK keys according to the following 3013 * requirements: 3014 * 1) They do not hand over frames decrypted with the old key to mac80211 3015 once the call to set_key() with command %DISABLE_KEY has been completed, 3016 2) either drop or continue to use the old key for any outgoing frames queued 3017 at the time of the key deletion (including re-transmits), 3018 3) never send out a frame queued prior to the set_key() %SET_KEY command 3019 encrypted with the new key when also needing 3020 @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV and 3021 4) never send out a frame unencrypted when it should be encrypted. 3022 Mac80211 will not queue any new frames for a deleted key to the driver. 3023 */ 3024 3025 /** 3026 * DOC: Powersave support 3027 * 3028 * mac80211 has support for various powersave implementations. 3029 * 3030 * First, it can support hardware that handles all powersaving by itself, 3031 * such hardware should simply set the %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS hardware 3032 * flag. In that case, it will be told about the desired powersave mode 3033 * with the %IEEE80211_CONF_PS flag depending on the association status. 3034 * The hardware must take care of sending nullfunc frames when necessary, 3035 * i.e. when entering and leaving powersave mode. The hardware is required 3036 * to look at the AID in beacons and signal to the AP that it woke up when 3037 * it finds traffic directed to it. 3038 * 3039 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS flag enabled means that the powersave mode defined in 3040 * IEEE 802.11-2007 section 11.2 is enabled. This is not to be confused 3041 * with hardware wakeup and sleep states. Driver is responsible for waking 3042 * up the hardware before issuing commands to the hardware and putting it 3043 * back to sleep at appropriate times. 3044 * 3045 * When PS is enabled, hardware needs to wakeup for beacons and receive the 3046 * buffered multicast/broadcast frames after the beacon. Also it must be 3047 * possible to send frames and receive the acknowledment frame. 3048 * 3049 * Other hardware designs cannot send nullfunc frames by themselves and also 3050 * need software support for parsing the TIM bitmap. This is also supported 3051 * by mac80211 by combining the %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS and 3052 * %IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK flags. The hardware is of course still 3053 * required to pass up beacons. The hardware is still required to handle 3054 * waking up for multicast traffic; if it cannot the driver must handle that 3055 * as best as it can, mac80211 is too slow to do that. 3056 * 3057 * Dynamic powersave is an extension to normal powersave in which the 3058 * hardware stays awake for a user-specified period of time after sending a 3059 * frame so that reply frames need not be buffered and therefore delayed to 3060 * the next wakeup. It's compromise of getting good enough latency when 3061 * there's data traffic and still saving significantly power in idle 3062 * periods. 3063 * 3064 * Dynamic powersave is simply supported by mac80211 enabling and disabling 3065 * PS based on traffic. Driver needs to only set %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS 3066 * flag and mac80211 will handle everything automatically. Additionally, 3067 * hardware having support for the dynamic PS feature may set the 3068 * %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS flag to indicate that it can support 3069 * dynamic PS mode itself. The driver needs to look at the 3070 * @dynamic_ps_timeout hardware configuration value and use it that value 3071 * whenever %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set. In this case mac80211 will disable 3072 * dynamic PS feature in stack and will just keep %IEEE80211_CONF_PS 3073 * enabled whenever user has enabled powersave. 3074 * 3075 * Driver informs U-APSD client support by enabling 3076 * %IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD flag. The mode is configured through the 3077 * uapsd parameter in conf_tx() operation. Hardware needs to send the QoS 3078 * Nullfunc frames and stay awake until the service period has ended. To 3079 * utilize U-APSD, dynamic powersave is disabled for voip AC and all frames 3080 * from that AC are transmitted with powersave enabled. 3081 * 3082 * Note: U-APSD client mode is not yet supported with 3083 * %IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK. 3084 */ 3085 3086 /** 3087 * DOC: Beacon filter support 3088 * 3089 * Some hardware have beacon filter support to reduce host cpu wakeups 3090 * which will reduce system power consumption. It usually works so that 3091 * the firmware creates a checksum of the beacon but omits all constantly 3092 * changing elements (TSF, TIM etc). Whenever the checksum changes the 3093 * beacon is forwarded to the host, otherwise it will be just dropped. That 3094 * way the host will only receive beacons where some relevant information 3095 * (for example ERP protection or WMM settings) have changed. 3096 * 3097 * Beacon filter support is advertised with the %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER 3098 * interface capability. The driver needs to enable beacon filter support 3099 * whenever power save is enabled, that is %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set. When 3100 * power save is enabled, the stack will not check for beacon loss and the 3101 * driver needs to notify about loss of beacons with ieee80211_beacon_loss(). 3102 * 3103 * The time (or number of beacons missed) until the firmware notifies the 3104 * driver of a beacon loss event (which in turn causes the driver to call 3105 * ieee80211_beacon_loss()) should be configurable and will be controlled 3106 * by mac80211 and the roaming algorithm in the future. 3107 * 3108 * Since there may be constantly changing information elements that nothing 3109 * in the software stack cares about, we will, in the future, have mac80211 3110 * tell the driver which information elements are interesting in the sense 3111 * that we want to see changes in them. This will include 3112 * 3113 * - a list of information element IDs 3114 * - a list of OUIs for the vendor information element 3115 * 3116 * Ideally, the hardware would filter out any beacons without changes in the 3117 * requested elements, but if it cannot support that it may, at the expense 3118 * of some efficiency, filter out only a subset. For example, if the device 3119 * doesn't support checking for OUIs it should pass up all changes in all 3120 * vendor information elements. 3121 * 3122 * Note that change, for the sake of simplification, also includes information 3123 * elements appearing or disappearing from the beacon. 3124 * 3125 * Some hardware supports an "ignore list" instead, just make sure nothing 3126 * that was requested is on the ignore list, and include commonly changing 3127 * information element IDs in the ignore list, for example 11 (BSS load) and 3128 * the various vendor-assigned IEs with unknown contents (128, 129, 133-136, 3129 * 149, 150, 155, 156, 173, 176, 178, 179, 219); for forward compatibility 3130 * it could also include some currently unused IDs. 3131 * 3132 * 3133 * In addition to these capabilities, hardware should support notifying the 3134 * host of changes in the beacon RSSI. This is relevant to implement roaming 3135 * when no traffic is flowing (when traffic is flowing we see the RSSI of 3136 * the received data packets). This can consist in notifying the host when 3137 * the RSSI changes significantly or when it drops below or rises above 3138 * configurable thresholds. In the future these thresholds will also be 3139 * configured by mac80211 (which gets them from userspace) to implement 3140 * them as the roaming algorithm requires. 3141 * 3142 * If the hardware cannot implement this, the driver should ask it to 3143 * periodically pass beacon frames to the host so that software can do the 3144 * signal strength threshold checking. 3145 */ 3146 3147 /** 3148 * DOC: Spatial multiplexing power save 3149 * 3150 * SMPS (Spatial multiplexing power save) is a mechanism to conserve 3151 * power in an 802.11n implementation. For details on the mechanism 3152 * and rationale, please refer to 802.11 (as amended by 802.11n-2009) 3153 * "11.2.3 SM power save". 3154 * 3155 * The mac80211 implementation is capable of sending action frames 3156 * to update the AP about the station's SMPS mode, and will instruct 3157 * the driver to enter the specific mode. It will also announce the 3158 * requested SMPS mode during the association handshake. Hardware 3159 * support for this feature is required, and can be indicated by 3160 * hardware flags. 3161 * 3162 * The default mode will be "automatic", which nl80211/cfg80211 3163 * defines to be dynamic SMPS in (regular) powersave, and SMPS 3164 * turned off otherwise. 3165 * 3166 * To support this feature, the driver must set the appropriate 3167 * hardware support flags, and handle the SMPS flag to the config() 3168 * operation. It will then with this mechanism be instructed to 3169 * enter the requested SMPS mode while associated to an HT AP. 3170 */ 3171 3172 /** 3173 * DOC: Frame filtering 3174 * 3175 * mac80211 requires to see many management frames for proper 3176 * operation, and users may want to see many more frames when 3177 * in monitor mode. However, for best CPU usage and power consumption, 3178 * having as few frames as possible percolate through the stack is 3179 * desirable. Hence, the hardware should filter as much as possible. 3180 * 3181 * To achieve this, mac80211 uses filter flags (see below) to tell 3182 * the driver's configure_filter() function which frames should be 3183 * passed to mac80211 and which should be filtered out. 3184 * 3185 * Before configure_filter() is invoked, the prepare_multicast() 3186 * callback is invoked with the parameters @mc_count and @mc_list 3187 * for the combined multicast address list of all virtual interfaces. 3188 * It's use is optional, and it returns a u64 that is passed to 3189 * configure_filter(). Additionally, configure_filter() has the 3190 * arguments @changed_flags telling which flags were changed and 3191 * @total_flags with the new flag states. 3192 * 3193 * If your device has no multicast address filters your driver will 3194 * need to check both the %FIF_ALLMULTI flag and the @mc_count 3195 * parameter to see whether multicast frames should be accepted 3196 * or dropped. 3197 * 3198 * All unsupported flags in @total_flags must be cleared. 3199 * Hardware does not support a flag if it is incapable of _passing_ 3200 * the frame to the stack. Otherwise the driver must ignore 3201 * the flag, but not clear it. 3202 * You must _only_ clear the flag (announce no support for the 3203 * flag to mac80211) if you are not able to pass the packet type 3204 * to the stack (so the hardware always filters it). 3205 * So for example, you should clear @FIF_CONTROL, if your hardware 3206 * always filters control frames. If your hardware always passes 3207 * control frames to the kernel and is incapable of filtering them, 3208 * you do _not_ clear the @FIF_CONTROL flag. 3209 * This rule applies to all other FIF flags as well. 3210 */ 3211 3212 /** 3213 * DOC: AP support for powersaving clients 3214 * 3215 * In order to implement AP and P2P GO modes, mac80211 has support for 3216 * client powersaving, both "legacy" PS (PS-Poll/null data) and uAPSD. 3217 * There currently is no support for sAPSD. 3218 * 3219 * There is one assumption that mac80211 makes, namely that a client 3220 * will not poll with PS-Poll and trigger with uAPSD at the same time. 3221 * Both are supported, and both can be used by the same client, but 3222 * they can't be used concurrently by the same client. This simplifies 3223 * the driver code. 3224 * 3225 * The first thing to keep in mind is that there is a flag for complete 3226 * driver implementation: %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS. If this flag is set, 3227 * mac80211 expects the driver to handle most of the state machine for 3228 * powersaving clients and will ignore the PM bit in incoming frames. 3229 * Drivers then use ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() to inform mac80211 of 3230 * stations' powersave transitions. In this mode, mac80211 also doesn't 3231 * handle PS-Poll/uAPSD. 3232 * 3233 * In the mode without %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS, mac80211 will check the 3234 * PM bit in incoming frames for client powersave transitions. When a 3235 * station goes to sleep, we will stop transmitting to it. There is, 3236 * however, a race condition: a station might go to sleep while there is 3237 * data buffered on hardware queues. If the device has support for this 3238 * it will reject frames, and the driver should give the frames back to 3239 * mac80211 with the %IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED flag set which will 3240 * cause mac80211 to retry the frame when the station wakes up. The 3241 * driver is also notified of powersave transitions by calling its 3242 * @sta_notify callback. 3243 * 3244 * When the station is asleep, it has three choices: it can wake up, 3245 * it can PS-Poll, or it can possibly start a uAPSD service period. 3246 * Waking up is implemented by simply transmitting all buffered (and 3247 * filtered) frames to the station. This is the easiest case. When 3248 * the station sends a PS-Poll or a uAPSD trigger frame, mac80211 3249 * will inform the driver of this with the @allow_buffered_frames 3250 * callback; this callback is optional. mac80211 will then transmit 3251 * the frames as usual and set the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER 3252 * on each frame. The last frame in the service period (or the only 3253 * response to a PS-Poll) also has %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP set to 3254 * indicate that it ends the service period; as this frame must have 3255 * TX status report it also sets %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS. 3256 * When TX status is reported for this frame, the service period is 3257 * marked has having ended and a new one can be started by the peer. 3258 * 3259 * Additionally, non-bufferable MMPDUs can also be transmitted by 3260 * mac80211 with the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER set in them. 3261 * 3262 * Another race condition can happen on some devices like iwlwifi 3263 * when there are frames queued for the station and it wakes up 3264 * or polls; the frames that are already queued could end up being 3265 * transmitted first instead, causing reordering and/or wrong 3266 * processing of the EOSP. The cause is that allowing frames to be 3267 * transmitted to a certain station is out-of-band communication to 3268 * the device. To allow this problem to be solved, the driver can 3269 * call ieee80211_sta_block_awake() if frames are buffered when it 3270 * is notified that the station went to sleep. When all these frames 3271 * have been filtered (see above), it must call the function again 3272 * to indicate that the station is no longer blocked. 3273 * 3274 * If the driver buffers frames in the driver for aggregation in any 3275 * way, it must use the ieee80211_sta_set_buffered() call when it is 3276 * notified of the station going to sleep to inform mac80211 of any 3277 * TIDs that have frames buffered. Note that when a station wakes up 3278 * this information is reset (hence the requirement to call it when 3279 * informed of the station going to sleep). Then, when a service 3280 * period starts for any reason, @release_buffered_frames is called 3281 * with the number of frames to be released and which TIDs they are 3282 * to come from. In this case, the driver is responsible for setting 3283 * the EOSP (for uAPSD) and MORE_DATA bits in the released frames, 3284 * to help the @more_data parameter is passed to tell the driver if 3285 * there is more data on other TIDs -- the TIDs to release frames 3286 * from are ignored since mac80211 doesn't know how many frames the 3287 * buffers for those TIDs contain. 3288 * 3289 * If the driver also implement GO mode, where absence periods may 3290 * shorten service periods (or abort PS-Poll responses), it must 3291 * filter those response frames except in the case of frames that 3292 * are buffered in the driver -- those must remain buffered to avoid 3293 * reordering. Because it is possible that no frames are released 3294 * in this case, the driver must call ieee80211_sta_eosp() 3295 * to indicate to mac80211 that the service period ended anyway. 3296 * 3297 * Finally, if frames from multiple TIDs are released from mac80211 3298 * but the driver might reorder them, it must clear & set the flags 3299 * appropriately (only the last frame may have %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP) 3300 * and also take care of the EOSP and MORE_DATA bits in the frame. 3301 * The driver may also use ieee80211_sta_eosp() in this case. 3302 * 3303 * Note that if the driver ever buffers frames other than QoS-data 3304 * frames, it must take care to never send a non-QoS-data frame as 3305 * the last frame in a service period, adding a QoS-nulldata frame 3306 * after a non-QoS-data frame if needed. 3307 */ 3308 3309 /** 3310 * DOC: HW queue control 3311 * 3312 * Before HW queue control was introduced, mac80211 only had a single static 3313 * assignment of per-interface AC software queues to hardware queues. This 3314 * was problematic for a few reasons: 3315 * 1) off-channel transmissions might get stuck behind other frames 3316 * 2) multiple virtual interfaces couldn't be handled correctly 3317 * 3) after-DTIM frames could get stuck behind other frames 3318 * 3319 * To solve this, hardware typically uses multiple different queues for all 3320 * the different usages, and this needs to be propagated into mac80211 so it 3321 * won't have the same problem with the software queues. 3322 * 3323 * Therefore, mac80211 now offers the %IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL capability 3324 * flag that tells it that the driver implements its own queue control. To do 3325 * so, the driver will set up the various queues in each &struct ieee80211_vif 3326 * and the offchannel queue in &struct ieee80211_hw. In response, mac80211 will 3327 * use those queue IDs in the hw_queue field of &struct ieee80211_tx_info and 3328 * if necessary will queue the frame on the right software queue that mirrors 3329 * the hardware queue. 3330 * Additionally, the driver has to then use these HW queue IDs for the queue 3331 * management functions (ieee80211_stop_queue() et al.) 3332 * 3333 * The driver is free to set up the queue mappings as needed, multiple virtual 3334 * interfaces may map to the same hardware queues if needed. The setup has to 3335 * happen during add_interface or change_interface callbacks. For example, a 3336 * driver supporting station+station and station+AP modes might decide to have 3337 * 10 hardware queues to handle different scenarios: 3338 * 3339 * 4 AC HW queues for 1st vif: 0, 1, 2, 3 3340 * 4 AC HW queues for 2nd vif: 4, 5, 6, 7 3341 * after-DTIM queue for AP: 8 3342 * off-channel queue: 9 3343 * 3344 * It would then set up the hardware like this: 3345 * hw.offchannel_tx_hw_queue = 9 3346 * 3347 * and the first virtual interface that is added as follows: 3348 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_VO] = 0 3349 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_VI] = 1 3350 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_BE] = 2 3351 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_BK] = 3 3352 * vif.cab_queue = 8 // if AP mode, otherwise %IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE 3353 * and the second virtual interface with 4-7. 3354 * 3355 * If queue 6 gets full, for example, mac80211 would only stop the second 3356 * virtual interface's BE queue since virtual interface queues are per AC. 3357 * 3358 * Note that the vif.cab_queue value should be set to %IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE 3359 * whenever the queue is not used (i.e. the interface is not in AP mode) if the 3360 * queue could potentially be shared since mac80211 will look at cab_queue when 3361 * a queue is stopped/woken even if the interface is not in AP mode. 3362 */ 3363 3364 /** 3365 * enum ieee80211_filter_flags - hardware filter flags 3366 * 3367 * These flags determine what the filter in hardware should be 3368 * programmed to let through and what should not be passed to the 3369 * stack. It is always safe to pass more frames than requested, 3370 * but this has negative impact on power consumption. 3371 * 3372 * @FIF_ALLMULTI: pass all multicast frames, this is used if requested 3373 * by the user or if the hardware is not capable of filtering by 3374 * multicast address. 3375 * 3376 * @FIF_FCSFAIL: pass frames with failed FCS (but you need to set the 3377 * %RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC for them) 3378 * 3379 * @FIF_PLCPFAIL: pass frames with failed PLCP CRC (but you need to set 3380 * the %RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC for them 3381 * 3382 * @FIF_BCN_PRBRESP_PROMISC: This flag is set during scanning to indicate 3383 * to the hardware that it should not filter beacons or probe responses 3384 * by BSSID. Filtering them can greatly reduce the amount of processing 3385 * mac80211 needs to do and the amount of CPU wakeups, so you should 3386 * honour this flag if possible. 3387 * 3388 * @FIF_CONTROL: pass control frames (except for PS Poll) addressed to this 3389 * station 3390 * 3391 * @FIF_OTHER_BSS: pass frames destined to other BSSes 3392 * 3393 * @FIF_PSPOLL: pass PS Poll frames 3394 * 3395 * @FIF_PROBE_REQ: pass probe request frames 3396 * 3397 * @FIF_MCAST_ACTION: pass multicast Action frames 3398 */ 3399 enum ieee80211_filter_flags { 3400 FIF_ALLMULTI = 1<<1, 3401 FIF_FCSFAIL = 1<<2, 3402 FIF_PLCPFAIL = 1<<3, 3403 FIF_BCN_PRBRESP_PROMISC = 1<<4, 3404 FIF_CONTROL = 1<<5, 3405 FIF_OTHER_BSS = 1<<6, 3406 FIF_PSPOLL = 1<<7, 3407 FIF_PROBE_REQ = 1<<8, 3408 FIF_MCAST_ACTION = 1<<9, 3409 }; 3410 3411 /** 3412 * enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action - A-MPDU actions 3413 * 3414 * These flags are used with the ampdu_action() callback in 3415 * &struct ieee80211_ops to indicate which action is needed. 3416 * 3417 * Note that drivers MUST be able to deal with a TX aggregation 3418 * session being stopped even before they OK'ed starting it by 3419 * calling ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe, because the peer 3420 * might receive the addBA frame and send a delBA right away! 3421 * 3422 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START: start RX aggregation 3423 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_STOP: stop RX aggregation 3424 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START: start TX aggregation, the driver must either 3425 * call ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() or 3426 * call ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() with status 3427 * %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START_DELAY_ADDBA to delay addba after 3428 * ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe is called, or just return the special 3429 * status %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START_IMMEDIATE. 3430 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL: TX aggregation has become operational 3431 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_CONT: stop TX aggregation but continue transmitting 3432 * queued packets, now unaggregated. After all packets are transmitted the 3433 * driver has to call ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe(). 3434 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH: stop TX aggregation and flush all packets, 3435 * called when the station is removed. There's no need or reason to call 3436 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() in this case as mac80211 assumes the 3437 * session is gone and removes the station. 3438 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH_CONT: called when TX aggregation is stopped 3439 * but the driver hasn't called ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() yet and 3440 * now the connection is dropped and the station will be removed. Drivers 3441 * should clean up and drop remaining packets when this is called. 3442 */ 3443 enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action { 3444 IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START, 3445 IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_STOP, 3446 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START, 3447 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_CONT, 3448 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH, 3449 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH_CONT, 3450 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL, 3451 }; 3452 3453 #define IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START_IMMEDIATE 1 3454 #define IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START_DELAY_ADDBA 2 3455 3456 /** 3457 * struct ieee80211_ampdu_params - AMPDU action parameters 3458 * 3459 * @action: the ampdu action, value from %ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action. 3460 * @sta: peer of this AMPDU session 3461 * @tid: tid of the BA session 3462 * @ssn: start sequence number of the session. TX/RX_STOP can pass 0. When 3463 * action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START the driver passes back the 3464 * actual ssn value used to start the session and writes the value here. 3465 * @buf_size: reorder buffer size (number of subframes). Valid only when the 3466 * action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START or 3467 * %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL 3468 * @amsdu: indicates the peer's ability to receive A-MSDU within A-MPDU. 3469 * valid when the action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL 3470 * @timeout: BA session timeout. Valid only when the action is set to 3471 * %IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START 3472 */ 3473 struct ieee80211_ampdu_params { 3474 enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action action; 3475 struct ieee80211_sta *sta; 3476 u16 tid; 3477 u16 ssn; 3478 u16 buf_size; 3479 bool amsdu; 3480 u16 timeout; 3481 }; 3482 3483 /** 3484 * enum ieee80211_frame_release_type - frame release reason 3485 * @IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_PSPOLL: frame released for PS-Poll 3486 * @IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_UAPSD: frame(s) released due to 3487 * frame received on trigger-enabled AC 3488 */ 3489 enum ieee80211_frame_release_type { 3490 IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_PSPOLL, 3491 IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_UAPSD, 3492 }; 3493 3494 /** 3495 * enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed - flags to indicate what changed 3496 * 3497 * @IEEE80211_RC_BW_CHANGED: The bandwidth that can be used to transmit 3498 * to this station changed. The actual bandwidth is in the station 3499 * information -- for HT20/40 the IEEE80211_HT_CAP_SUP_WIDTH_20_40 3500 * flag changes, for HT and VHT the bandwidth field changes. 3501 * @IEEE80211_RC_SMPS_CHANGED: The SMPS state of the station changed. 3502 * @IEEE80211_RC_SUPP_RATES_CHANGED: The supported rate set of this peer 3503 * changed (in IBSS mode) due to discovering more information about 3504 * the peer. 3505 * @IEEE80211_RC_NSS_CHANGED: N_SS (number of spatial streams) was changed 3506 * by the peer 3507 */ 3508 enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed { 3509 IEEE80211_RC_BW_CHANGED = BIT(0), 3510 IEEE80211_RC_SMPS_CHANGED = BIT(1), 3511 IEEE80211_RC_SUPP_RATES_CHANGED = BIT(2), 3512 IEEE80211_RC_NSS_CHANGED = BIT(3), 3513 }; 3514 3515 /** 3516 * enum ieee80211_roc_type - remain on channel type 3517 * 3518 * With the support for multi channel contexts and multi channel operations, 3519 * remain on channel operations might be limited/deferred/aborted by other 3520 * flows/operations which have higher priority (and vice versa). 3521 * Specifying the ROC type can be used by devices to prioritize the ROC 3522 * operations compared to other operations/flows. 3523 * 3524 * @IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_NORMAL: There are no special requirements for this ROC. 3525 * @IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_MGMT_TX: The remain on channel request is required 3526 * for sending management frames offchannel. 3527 */ 3528 enum ieee80211_roc_type { 3529 IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_NORMAL = 0, 3530 IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_MGMT_TX, 3531 }; 3532 3533 /** 3534 * enum ieee80211_reconfig_type - reconfig type 3535 * 3536 * This enum is used by the reconfig_complete() callback to indicate what 3537 * reconfiguration type was completed. 3538 * 3539 * @IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_RESTART: hw restart type 3540 * (also due to resume() callback returning 1) 3541 * @IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_SUSPEND: suspend type (regardless 3542 * of wowlan configuration) 3543 */ 3544 enum ieee80211_reconfig_type { 3545 IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_RESTART, 3546 IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_SUSPEND, 3547 }; 3548 3549 /** 3550 * struct ieee80211_prep_tx_info - prepare TX information 3551 * @duration: if non-zero, hint about the required duration, 3552 * only used with the mgd_prepare_tx() method. 3553 * @subtype: frame subtype (auth, (re)assoc, deauth, disassoc) 3554 * @success: whether the frame exchange was successful, only 3555 * used with the mgd_complete_tx() method, and then only 3556 * valid for auth and (re)assoc. 3557 */ 3558 struct ieee80211_prep_tx_info { 3559 u16 duration; 3560 u16 subtype; 3561 u8 success:1; 3562 }; 3563 3564 /** 3565 * struct ieee80211_ops - callbacks from mac80211 to the driver 3566 * 3567 * This structure contains various callbacks that the driver may 3568 * handle or, in some cases, must handle, for example to configure 3569 * the hardware to a new channel or to transmit a frame. 3570 * 3571 * @tx: Handler that 802.11 module calls for each transmitted frame. 3572 * skb contains the buffer starting from the IEEE 802.11 header. 3573 * The low-level driver should send the frame out based on 3574 * configuration in the TX control data. This handler should, 3575 * preferably, never fail and stop queues appropriately. 3576 * Must be atomic. 3577 * 3578 * @start: Called before the first netdevice attached to the hardware 3579 * is enabled. This should turn on the hardware and must turn on 3580 * frame reception (for possibly enabled monitor interfaces.) 3581 * Returns negative error codes, these may be seen in userspace, 3582 * or zero. 3583 * When the device is started it should not have a MAC address 3584 * to avoid acknowledging frames before a non-monitor device 3585 * is added. 3586 * Must be implemented and can sleep. 3587 * 3588 * @stop: Called after last netdevice attached to the hardware 3589 * is disabled. This should turn off the hardware (at least 3590 * it must turn off frame reception.) 3591 * May be called right after add_interface if that rejects 3592 * an interface. If you added any work onto the mac80211 workqueue 3593 * you should ensure to cancel it on this callback. 3594 * Must be implemented and can sleep. 3595 * 3596 * @suspend: Suspend the device; mac80211 itself will quiesce before and 3597 * stop transmitting and doing any other configuration, and then 3598 * ask the device to suspend. This is only invoked when WoWLAN is 3599 * configured, otherwise the device is deconfigured completely and 3600 * reconfigured at resume time. 3601 * The driver may also impose special conditions under which it 3602 * wants to use the "normal" suspend (deconfigure), say if it only 3603 * supports WoWLAN when the device is associated. In this case, it 3604 * must return 1 from this function. 3605 * 3606 * @resume: If WoWLAN was configured, this indicates that mac80211 is 3607 * now resuming its operation, after this the device must be fully 3608 * functional again. If this returns an error, the only way out is 3609 * to also unregister the device. If it returns 1, then mac80211 3610 * will also go through the regular complete restart on resume. 3611 * 3612 * @set_wakeup: Enable or disable wakeup when WoWLAN configuration is 3613 * modified. The reason is that device_set_wakeup_enable() is 3614 * supposed to be called when the configuration changes, not only 3615 * in suspend(). 3616 * 3617 * @add_interface: Called when a netdevice attached to the hardware is 3618 * enabled. Because it is not called for monitor mode devices, @start 3619 * and @stop must be implemented. 3620 * The driver should perform any initialization it needs before 3621 * the device can be enabled. The initial configuration for the 3622 * interface is given in the conf parameter. 3623 * The callback may refuse to add an interface by returning a 3624 * negative error code (which will be seen in userspace.) 3625 * Must be implemented and can sleep. 3626 * 3627 * @change_interface: Called when a netdevice changes type. This callback 3628 * is optional, but only if it is supported can interface types be 3629 * switched while the interface is UP. The callback may sleep. 3630 * Note that while an interface is being switched, it will not be 3631 * found by the interface iteration callbacks. 3632 * 3633 * @remove_interface: Notifies a driver that an interface is going down. 3634 * The @stop callback is called after this if it is the last interface 3635 * and no monitor interfaces are present. 3636 * When all interfaces are removed, the MAC address in the hardware 3637 * must be cleared so the device no longer acknowledges packets, 3638 * the mac_addr member of the conf structure is, however, set to the 3639 * MAC address of the device going away. 3640 * Hence, this callback must be implemented. It can sleep. 3641 * 3642 * @config: Handler for configuration requests. IEEE 802.11 code calls this 3643 * function to change hardware configuration, e.g., channel. 3644 * This function should never fail but returns a negative error code 3645 * if it does. The callback can sleep. 3646 * 3647 * @bss_info_changed: Handler for configuration requests related to BSS 3648 * parameters that may vary during BSS's lifespan, and may affect low 3649 * level driver (e.g. assoc/disassoc status, erp parameters). 3650 * This function should not be used if no BSS has been set, unless 3651 * for association indication. The @changed parameter indicates which 3652 * of the bss parameters has changed when a call is made. The callback 3653 * can sleep. 3654 * Note: this callback is called if @vif_cfg_changed or @link_info_changed 3655 * are not implemented. 3656 * 3657 * @vif_cfg_changed: Handler for configuration requests related to interface 3658 * (MLD) parameters from &struct ieee80211_vif_cfg that vary during the 3659 * lifetime of the interface (e.g. assoc status, IP addresses, etc.) 3660 * The @changed parameter indicates which value changed. 3661 * The callback can sleep. 3662 * 3663 * @link_info_changed: Handler for configuration requests related to link 3664 * parameters from &struct ieee80211_bss_conf that are related to an 3665 * individual link. e.g. legacy/HT/VHT/... rate information. 3666 * The @changed parameter indicates which value changed, and the @link_id 3667 * parameter indicates the link ID. Note that the @link_id will be 0 for 3668 * non-MLO connections. 3669 * The callback can sleep. 3670 * 3671 * @prepare_multicast: Prepare for multicast filter configuration. 3672 * This callback is optional, and its return value is passed 3673 * to configure_filter(). This callback must be atomic. 3674 * 3675 * @configure_filter: Configure the device's RX filter. 3676 * See the section "Frame filtering" for more information. 3677 * This callback must be implemented and can sleep. 3678 * 3679 * @config_iface_filter: Configure the interface's RX filter. 3680 * This callback is optional and is used to configure which frames 3681 * should be passed to mac80211. The filter_flags is the combination 3682 * of FIF_* flags. The changed_flags is a bit mask that indicates 3683 * which flags are changed. 3684 * This callback can sleep. 3685 * 3686 * @set_tim: Set TIM bit. mac80211 calls this function when a TIM bit 3687 * must be set or cleared for a given STA. Must be atomic. 3688 * 3689 * @set_key: See the section "Hardware crypto acceleration" 3690 * This callback is only called between add_interface and 3691 * remove_interface calls, i.e. while the given virtual interface 3692 * is enabled. 3693 * Returns a negative error code if the key can't be added. 3694 * The callback can sleep. 3695 * 3696 * @update_tkip_key: See the section "Hardware crypto acceleration" 3697 * This callback will be called in the context of Rx. Called for drivers 3698 * which set IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_TKIP_REQ_RX_P1_KEY. 3699 * The callback must be atomic. 3700 * 3701 * @set_rekey_data: If the device supports GTK rekeying, for example while the 3702 * host is suspended, it can assign this callback to retrieve the data 3703 * necessary to do GTK rekeying, this is the KEK, KCK and replay counter. 3704 * After rekeying was done it should (for example during resume) notify 3705 * userspace of the new replay counter using ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify(). 3706 * 3707 * @set_default_unicast_key: Set the default (unicast) key index, useful for 3708 * WEP when the device sends data packets autonomously, e.g. for ARP 3709 * offloading. The index can be 0-3, or -1 for unsetting it. 3710 * 3711 * @hw_scan: Ask the hardware to service the scan request, no need to start 3712 * the scan state machine in stack. The scan must honour the channel 3713 * configuration done by the regulatory agent in the wiphy's 3714 * registered bands. The hardware (or the driver) needs to make sure 3715 * that power save is disabled. 3716 * The @req ie/ie_len members are rewritten by mac80211 to contain the 3717 * entire IEs after the SSID, so that drivers need not look at these 3718 * at all but just send them after the SSID -- mac80211 includes the 3719 * (extended) supported rates and HT information (where applicable). 3720 * When the scan finishes, ieee80211_scan_completed() must be called; 3721 * note that it also must be called when the scan cannot finish due to 3722 * any error unless this callback returned a negative error code. 3723 * This callback is also allowed to return the special return value 1, 3724 * this indicates that hardware scan isn't desirable right now and a 3725 * software scan should be done instead. A driver wishing to use this 3726 * capability must ensure its (hardware) scan capabilities aren't 3727 * advertised as more capable than mac80211's software scan is. 3728 * The callback can sleep. 3729 * 3730 * @cancel_hw_scan: Ask the low-level tp cancel the active hw scan. 3731 * The driver should ask the hardware to cancel the scan (if possible), 3732 * but the scan will be completed only after the driver will call 3733 * ieee80211_scan_completed(). 3734 * This callback is needed for wowlan, to prevent enqueueing a new 3735 * scan_work after the low-level driver was already suspended. 3736 * The callback can sleep. 3737 * 3738 * @sched_scan_start: Ask the hardware to start scanning repeatedly at 3739 * specific intervals. The driver must call the 3740 * ieee80211_sched_scan_results() function whenever it finds results. 3741 * This process will continue until sched_scan_stop is called. 3742 * 3743 * @sched_scan_stop: Tell the hardware to stop an ongoing scheduled scan. 3744 * In this case, ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped() must not be called. 3745 * 3746 * @sw_scan_start: Notifier function that is called just before a software scan 3747 * is started. Can be NULL, if the driver doesn't need this notification. 3748 * The mac_addr parameter allows supporting NL80211_SCAN_FLAG_RANDOM_ADDR, 3749 * the driver may set the NL80211_FEATURE_SCAN_RANDOM_MAC_ADDR flag if it 3750 * can use this parameter. The callback can sleep. 3751 * 3752 * @sw_scan_complete: Notifier function that is called just after a 3753 * software scan finished. Can be NULL, if the driver doesn't need 3754 * this notification. 3755 * The callback can sleep. 3756 * 3757 * @get_stats: Return low-level statistics. 3758 * Returns zero if statistics are available. 3759 * The callback can sleep. 3760 * 3761 * @get_key_seq: If your device implements encryption in hardware and does 3762 * IV/PN assignment then this callback should be provided to read the 3763 * IV/PN for the given key from hardware. 3764 * The callback must be atomic. 3765 * 3766 * @set_frag_threshold: Configuration of fragmentation threshold. Assign this 3767 * if the device does fragmentation by itself. Note that to prevent the 3768 * stack from doing fragmentation IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_FRAG 3769 * should be set as well. 3770 * The callback can sleep. 3771 * 3772 * @set_rts_threshold: Configuration of RTS threshold (if device needs it) 3773 * The callback can sleep. 3774 * 3775 * @sta_add: Notifies low level driver about addition of an associated station, 3776 * AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. This callback can sleep. 3777 * 3778 * @sta_remove: Notifies low level driver about removal of an associated 3779 * station, AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. Note that after the callback 3780 * returns it isn't safe to use the pointer, not even RCU protected; 3781 * no RCU grace period is guaranteed between returning here and freeing 3782 * the station. See @sta_pre_rcu_remove if needed. 3783 * This callback can sleep. 3784 * 3785 * @sta_add_debugfs: Drivers can use this callback to add debugfs files 3786 * when a station is added to mac80211's station list. This callback 3787 * should be within a CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS conditional. This 3788 * callback can sleep. 3789 * 3790 * @sta_notify: Notifies low level driver about power state transition of an 3791 * associated station, AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. For a VIF operating 3792 * in AP mode, this callback will not be called when the flag 3793 * %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS is set. Must be atomic. 3794 * 3795 * @sta_set_txpwr: Configure the station tx power. This callback set the tx 3796 * power for the station. 3797 * This callback can sleep. 3798 * 3799 * @sta_state: Notifies low level driver about state transition of a 3800 * station (which can be the AP, a client, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc.) 3801 * This callback is mutually exclusive with @sta_add/@sta_remove. 3802 * It must not fail for down transitions but may fail for transitions 3803 * up the list of states. Also note that after the callback returns it 3804 * isn't safe to use the pointer, not even RCU protected - no RCU grace 3805 * period is guaranteed between returning here and freeing the station. 3806 * See @sta_pre_rcu_remove if needed. 3807 * The callback can sleep. 3808 * 3809 * @sta_pre_rcu_remove: Notify driver about station removal before RCU 3810 * synchronisation. This is useful if a driver needs to have station 3811 * pointers protected using RCU, it can then use this call to clear 3812 * the pointers instead of waiting for an RCU grace period to elapse 3813 * in @sta_state. 3814 * The callback can sleep. 3815 * 3816 * @sta_rc_update: Notifies the driver of changes to the bitrates that can be 3817 * used to transmit to the station. The changes are advertised with bits 3818 * from &enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed and the values are reflected 3819 * in the station data. This callback should only be used when the driver 3820 * uses hardware rate control (%IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL) since 3821 * otherwise the rate control algorithm is notified directly. 3822 * Must be atomic. 3823 * @sta_rate_tbl_update: Notifies the driver that the rate table changed. This 3824 * is only used if the configured rate control algorithm actually uses 3825 * the new rate table API, and is therefore optional. Must be atomic. 3826 * 3827 * @sta_statistics: Get statistics for this station. For example with beacon 3828 * filtering, the statistics kept by mac80211 might not be accurate, so 3829 * let the driver pre-fill the statistics. The driver can fill most of 3830 * the values (indicating which by setting the filled bitmap), but not 3831 * all of them make sense - see the source for which ones are possible. 3832 * Statistics that the driver doesn't fill will be filled by mac80211. 3833 * The callback can sleep. 3834 * 3835 * @conf_tx: Configure TX queue parameters (EDCF (aifs, cw_min, cw_max), 3836 * bursting) for a hardware TX queue. 3837 * Returns a negative error code on failure. 3838 * The callback can sleep. 3839 * 3840 * @get_tsf: Get the current TSF timer value from firmware/hardware. Currently, 3841 * this is only used for IBSS mode BSSID merging and debugging. Is not a 3842 * required function. 3843 * The callback can sleep. 3844 * 3845 * @set_tsf: Set the TSF timer to the specified value in the firmware/hardware. 3846 * Currently, this is only used for IBSS mode debugging. Is not a 3847 * required function. 3848 * The callback can sleep. 3849 * 3850 * @offset_tsf: Offset the TSF timer by the specified value in the 3851 * firmware/hardware. Preferred to set_tsf as it avoids delay between 3852 * calling set_tsf() and hardware getting programmed, which will show up 3853 * as TSF delay. Is not a required function. 3854 * The callback can sleep. 3855 * 3856 * @reset_tsf: Reset the TSF timer and allow firmware/hardware to synchronize 3857 * with other STAs in the IBSS. This is only used in IBSS mode. This 3858 * function is optional if the firmware/hardware takes full care of 3859 * TSF synchronization. 3860 * The callback can sleep. 3861 * 3862 * @tx_last_beacon: Determine whether the last IBSS beacon was sent by us. 3863 * This is needed only for IBSS mode and the result of this function is 3864 * used to determine whether to reply to Probe Requests. 3865 * Returns non-zero if this device sent the last beacon. 3866 * The callback can sleep. 3867 * 3868 * @get_survey: Return per-channel survey information 3869 * 3870 * @rfkill_poll: Poll rfkill hardware state. If you need this, you also 3871 * need to set wiphy->rfkill_poll to %true before registration, 3872 * and need to call wiphy_rfkill_set_hw_state() in the callback. 3873 * The callback can sleep. 3874 * 3875 * @set_coverage_class: Set slot time for given coverage class as specified 3876 * in IEEE 802.11-2007 section 17.3.8.6 and modify ACK timeout 3877 * accordingly; coverage class equals to -1 to enable ACK timeout 3878 * estimation algorithm (dynack). To disable dynack set valid value for 3879 * coverage class. This callback is not required and may sleep. 3880 * 3881 * @testmode_cmd: Implement a cfg80211 test mode command. The passed @vif may 3882 * be %NULL. The callback can sleep. 3883 * @testmode_dump: Implement a cfg80211 test mode dump. The callback can sleep. 3884 * 3885 * @flush: Flush all pending frames from the hardware queue, making sure 3886 * that the hardware queues are empty. The @queues parameter is a bitmap 3887 * of queues to flush, which is useful if different virtual interfaces 3888 * use different hardware queues; it may also indicate all queues. 3889 * If the parameter @drop is set to %true, pending frames may be dropped. 3890 * Note that vif can be NULL. 3891 * The callback can sleep. 3892 * 3893 * @channel_switch: Drivers that need (or want) to offload the channel 3894 * switch operation for CSAs received from the AP may implement this 3895 * callback. They must then call ieee80211_chswitch_done() to indicate 3896 * completion of the channel switch. 3897 * 3898 * @set_antenna: Set antenna configuration (tx_ant, rx_ant) on the device. 3899 * Parameters are bitmaps of allowed antennas to use for TX/RX. Drivers may 3900 * reject TX/RX mask combinations they cannot support by returning -EINVAL 3901 * (also see nl80211.h @NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY_ANTENNA_TX). 3902 * 3903 * @get_antenna: Get current antenna configuration from device (tx_ant, rx_ant). 3904 * 3905 * @remain_on_channel: Starts an off-channel period on the given channel, must 3906 * call back to ieee80211_ready_on_channel() when on that channel. Note 3907 * that normal channel traffic is not stopped as this is intended for hw 3908 * offload. Frames to transmit on the off-channel channel are transmitted 3909 * normally except for the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN flag. When the 3910 * duration (which will always be non-zero) expires, the driver must call 3911 * ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired(). 3912 * Note that this callback may be called while the device is in IDLE and 3913 * must be accepted in this case. 3914 * This callback may sleep. 3915 * @cancel_remain_on_channel: Requests that an ongoing off-channel period is 3916 * aborted before it expires. This callback may sleep. 3917 * 3918 * @set_ringparam: Set tx and rx ring sizes. 3919 * 3920 * @get_ringparam: Get tx and rx ring current and maximum sizes. 3921 * 3922 * @tx_frames_pending: Check if there is any pending frame in the hardware 3923 * queues before entering power save. 3924 * 3925 * @set_bitrate_mask: Set a mask of rates to be used for rate control selection 3926 * when transmitting a frame. Currently only legacy rates are handled. 3927 * The callback can sleep. 3928 * @event_callback: Notify driver about any event in mac80211. See 3929 * &enum ieee80211_event_type for the different types. 3930 * The callback must be atomic. 3931 * 3932 * @release_buffered_frames: Release buffered frames according to the given 3933 * parameters. In the case where the driver buffers some frames for 3934 * sleeping stations mac80211 will use this callback to tell the driver 3935 * to release some frames, either for PS-poll or uAPSD. 3936 * Note that if the @more_data parameter is %false the driver must check 3937 * if there are more frames on the given TIDs, and if there are more than 3938 * the frames being released then it must still set the more-data bit in 3939 * the frame. If the @more_data parameter is %true, then of course the 3940 * more-data bit must always be set. 3941 * The @tids parameter tells the driver which TIDs to release frames 3942 * from, for PS-poll it will always have only a single bit set. 3943 * In the case this is used for a PS-poll initiated release, the 3944 * @num_frames parameter will always be 1 so code can be shared. In 3945 * this case the driver must also set %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP flag 3946 * on the TX status (and must report TX status) so that the PS-poll 3947 * period is properly ended. This is used to avoid sending multiple 3948 * responses for a retried PS-poll frame. 3949 * In the case this is used for uAPSD, the @num_frames parameter may be 3950 * bigger than one, but the driver may send fewer frames (it must send 3951 * at least one, however). In this case it is also responsible for 3952 * setting the EOSP flag in the QoS header of the frames. Also, when the 3953 * service period ends, the driver must set %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP 3954 * on the last frame in the SP. Alternatively, it may call the function 3955 * ieee80211_sta_eosp() to inform mac80211 of the end of the SP. 3956 * This callback must be atomic. 3957 * @allow_buffered_frames: Prepare device to allow the given number of frames 3958 * to go out to the given station. The frames will be sent by mac80211 3959 * via the usual TX path after this call. The TX information for frames 3960 * released will also have the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER flag set 3961 * and the last one will also have %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP set. In case 3962 * frames from multiple TIDs are released and the driver might reorder 3963 * them between the TIDs, it must set the %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP flag 3964 * on the last frame and clear it on all others and also handle the EOSP 3965 * bit in the QoS header correctly. Alternatively, it can also call the 3966 * ieee80211_sta_eosp() function. 3967 * The @tids parameter is a bitmap and tells the driver which TIDs the 3968 * frames will be on; it will at most have two bits set. 3969 * This callback must be atomic. 3970 * 3971 * @get_et_sset_count: Ethtool API to get string-set count. 3972 * 3973 * @get_et_stats: Ethtool API to get a set of u64 stats. 3974 * 3975 * @get_et_strings: Ethtool API to get a set of strings to describe stats 3976 * and perhaps other supported types of ethtool data-sets. 3977 * 3978 * @mgd_prepare_tx: Prepare for transmitting a management frame for association 3979 * before associated. In multi-channel scenarios, a virtual interface is 3980 * bound to a channel before it is associated, but as it isn't associated 3981 * yet it need not necessarily be given airtime, in particular since any 3982 * transmission to a P2P GO needs to be synchronized against the GO's 3983 * powersave state. mac80211 will call this function before transmitting a 3984 * management frame prior to having successfully associated to allow the 3985 * driver to give it channel time for the transmission, to get a response 3986 * and to be able to synchronize with the GO. 3987 * For drivers that set %IEEE80211_HW_DEAUTH_NEED_MGD_TX_PREP, mac80211 3988 * would also call this function before transmitting a deauthentication 3989 * frame in case that no beacon was heard from the AP/P2P GO. 3990 * The callback will be called before each transmission and upon return 3991 * mac80211 will transmit the frame right away. 3992 * Additional information is passed in the &struct ieee80211_prep_tx_info 3993 * data. If duration there is greater than zero, mac80211 hints to the 3994 * driver the duration for which the operation is requested. 3995 * The callback is optional and can (should!) sleep. 3996 * @mgd_complete_tx: Notify the driver that the response frame for a previously 3997 * transmitted frame announced with @mgd_prepare_tx was received, the data 3998 * is filled similarly to @mgd_prepare_tx though the duration is not used. 3999 * 4000 * @mgd_protect_tdls_discover: Protect a TDLS discovery session. After sending 4001 * a TDLS discovery-request, we expect a reply to arrive on the AP's 4002 * channel. We must stay on the channel (no PSM, scan, etc.), since a TDLS 4003 * setup-response is a direct packet not buffered by the AP. 4004 * mac80211 will call this function just before the transmission of a TDLS 4005 * discovery-request. The recommended period of protection is at least 4006 * 2 * (DTIM period). 4007 * The callback is optional and can sleep. 4008 * 4009 * @add_chanctx: Notifies device driver about new channel context creation. 4010 * This callback may sleep. 4011 * @remove_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context destruction. 4012 * This callback may sleep. 4013 * @change_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context changes that 4014 * may happen when combining different virtual interfaces on the same 4015 * channel context with different settings 4016 * This callback may sleep. 4017 * @assign_vif_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context being bound 4018 * to vif. Possible use is for hw queue remapping. 4019 * This callback may sleep. 4020 * @unassign_vif_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context being 4021 * unbound from vif. 4022 * This callback may sleep. 4023 * @switch_vif_chanctx: switch a number of vifs from one chanctx to 4024 * another, as specified in the list of 4025 * @ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch passed to the driver, according 4026 * to the mode defined in &ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode. 4027 * This callback may sleep. 4028 * 4029 * @start_ap: Start operation on the AP interface, this is called after all the 4030 * information in bss_conf is set and beacon can be retrieved. A channel 4031 * context is bound before this is called. Note that if the driver uses 4032 * software scan or ROC, this (and @stop_ap) isn't called when the AP is 4033 * just "paused" for scanning/ROC, which is indicated by the beacon being 4034 * disabled/enabled via @bss_info_changed. 4035 * @stop_ap: Stop operation on the AP interface. 4036 * 4037 * @reconfig_complete: Called after a call to ieee80211_restart_hw() and 4038 * during resume, when the reconfiguration has completed. 4039 * This can help the driver implement the reconfiguration step (and 4040 * indicate mac80211 is ready to receive frames). 4041 * This callback may sleep. 4042 * 4043 * @ipv6_addr_change: IPv6 address assignment on the given interface changed. 4044 * Currently, this is only called for managed or P2P client interfaces. 4045 * This callback is optional; it must not sleep. 4046 * 4047 * @channel_switch_beacon: Starts a channel switch to a new channel. 4048 * Beacons are modified to include CSA or ECSA IEs before calling this 4049 * function. The corresponding count fields in these IEs must be 4050 * decremented, and when they reach 1 the driver must call 4051 * ieee80211_csa_finish(). Drivers which use ieee80211_beacon_get() 4052 * get the csa counter decremented by mac80211, but must check if it is 4053 * 1 using ieee80211_beacon_counter_is_complete() after the beacon has been 4054 * transmitted and then call ieee80211_csa_finish(). 4055 * If the CSA count starts as zero or 1, this function will not be called, 4056 * since there won't be any time to beacon before the switch anyway. 4057 * @pre_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called 4058 * before a channel switch procedure is started (ie. when a STA 4059 * gets a CSA or a userspace initiated channel-switch), allowing 4060 * the driver to prepare for the channel switch. 4061 * @post_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called 4062 * after a channel switch procedure is completed, allowing the 4063 * driver to go back to a normal configuration. 4064 * @abort_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called 4065 * when channel switch procedure was completed, allowing the 4066 * driver to go back to a normal configuration. 4067 * @channel_switch_rx_beacon: This is an optional callback that is called 4068 * when channel switch procedure is in progress and additional beacon with 4069 * CSA IE was received, allowing driver to track changes in count. 4070 * @join_ibss: Join an IBSS (on an IBSS interface); this is called after all 4071 * information in bss_conf is set up and the beacon can be retrieved. A 4072 * channel context is bound before this is called. 4073 * @leave_ibss: Leave the IBSS again. 4074 * 4075 * @get_expected_throughput: extract the expected throughput towards the 4076 * specified station. The returned value is expressed in Kbps. It returns 0 4077 * if the RC algorithm does not have proper data to provide. 4078 * 4079 * @get_txpower: get current maximum tx power (in dBm) based on configuration 4080 * and hardware limits. 4081 * 4082 * @tdls_channel_switch: Start channel-switching with a TDLS peer. The driver 4083 * is responsible for continually initiating channel-switching operations 4084 * and returning to the base channel for communication with the AP. The 4085 * driver receives a channel-switch request template and the location of 4086 * the switch-timing IE within the template as part of the invocation. 4087 * The template is valid only within the call, and the driver can 4088 * optionally copy the skb for further re-use. 4089 * @tdls_cancel_channel_switch: Stop channel-switching with a TDLS peer. Both 4090 * peers must be on the base channel when the call completes. 4091 * @tdls_recv_channel_switch: a TDLS channel-switch related frame (request or 4092 * response) has been received from a remote peer. The driver gets 4093 * parameters parsed from the incoming frame and may use them to continue 4094 * an ongoing channel-switch operation. In addition, a channel-switch 4095 * response template is provided, together with the location of the 4096 * switch-timing IE within the template. The skb can only be used within 4097 * the function call. 4098 * 4099 * @wake_tx_queue: Called when new packets have been added to the queue. 4100 * @sync_rx_queues: Process all pending frames in RSS queues. This is a 4101 * synchronization which is needed in case driver has in its RSS queues 4102 * pending frames that were received prior to the control path action 4103 * currently taken (e.g. disassociation) but are not processed yet. 4104 * 4105 * @start_nan: join an existing NAN cluster, or create a new one. 4106 * @stop_nan: leave the NAN cluster. 4107 * @nan_change_conf: change NAN configuration. The data in cfg80211_nan_conf 4108 * contains full new configuration and changes specify which parameters 4109 * are changed with respect to the last NAN config. 4110 * The driver gets both full configuration and the changed parameters since 4111 * some devices may need the full configuration while others need only the 4112 * changed parameters. 4113 * @add_nan_func: Add a NAN function. Returns 0 on success. The data in 4114 * cfg80211_nan_func must not be referenced outside the scope of 4115 * this call. 4116 * @del_nan_func: Remove a NAN function. The driver must call 4117 * ieee80211_nan_func_terminated() with 4118 * NL80211_NAN_FUNC_TERM_REASON_USER_REQUEST reason code upon removal. 4119 * @can_aggregate_in_amsdu: Called in order to determine if HW supports 4120 * aggregating two specific frames in the same A-MSDU. The relation 4121 * between the skbs should be symmetric and transitive. Note that while 4122 * skb is always a real frame, head may or may not be an A-MSDU. 4123 * @get_ftm_responder_stats: Retrieve FTM responder statistics, if available. 4124 * Statistics should be cumulative, currently no way to reset is provided. 4125 * 4126 * @start_pmsr: start peer measurement (e.g. FTM) (this call can sleep) 4127 * @abort_pmsr: abort peer measurement (this call can sleep) 4128 * @set_tid_config: Apply TID specific configurations. This callback may sleep. 4129 * @reset_tid_config: Reset TID specific configuration for the peer. 4130 * This callback may sleep. 4131 * @update_vif_offload: Update virtual interface offload flags 4132 * This callback may sleep. 4133 * @sta_set_4addr: Called to notify the driver when a station starts/stops using 4134 * 4-address mode 4135 * @set_sar_specs: Update the SAR (TX power) settings. 4136 * @sta_set_decap_offload: Called to notify the driver when a station is allowed 4137 * to use rx decapsulation offload 4138 * @add_twt_setup: Update hw with TWT agreement parameters received from the peer. 4139 * This callback allows the hw to check if requested parameters 4140 * are supported and if there is enough room for a new agreement. 4141 * The hw is expected to set agreement result in the req_type field of 4142 * twt structure. 4143 * @twt_teardown_request: Update the hw with TWT teardown request received 4144 * from the peer. 4145 * @set_radar_background: Configure dedicated offchannel chain available for 4146 * radar/CAC detection on some hw. This chain can't be used to transmit 4147 * or receive frames and it is bounded to a running wdev. 4148 * Background radar/CAC detection allows to avoid the CAC downtime 4149 * switching to a different channel during CAC detection on the selected 4150 * radar channel. 4151 * The caller is expected to set chandef pointer to NULL in order to 4152 * disable background CAC/radar detection. 4153 * @net_fill_forward_path: Called from .ndo_fill_forward_path in order to 4154 * resolve a path for hardware flow offloading 4155 * @change_vif_links: Change the valid links on an interface, note that while 4156 * removing the old link information is still valid (link_conf pointer), 4157 * but may immediately disappear after the function returns. The old or 4158 * new links bitmaps may be 0 if going from/to a non-MLO situation. 4159 * The @old array contains pointers to the old bss_conf structures 4160 * that were already removed, in case they're needed. 4161 * This callback can sleep. 4162 * @change_sta_links: Change the valid links of a station, similar to 4163 * @change_vif_links. This callback can sleep. 4164 * Note that a sta can also be inserted or removed with valid links, 4165 * i.e. passed to @sta_add/@sta_state with sta->valid_links not zero. 4166 * In fact, cannot change from having valid_links and not having them. 4167 */ 4168 struct ieee80211_ops { 4169 void (*tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4170 struct ieee80211_tx_control *control, 4171 struct sk_buff *skb); 4172 int (*start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 4173 void (*stop)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 4174 #ifdef CONFIG_PM 4175 int (*suspend)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct cfg80211_wowlan *wowlan); 4176 int (*resume)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 4177 void (*set_wakeup)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, bool enabled); 4178 #endif 4179 int (*add_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4180 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4181 int (*change_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4182 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4183 enum nl80211_iftype new_type, bool p2p); 4184 void (*remove_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4185 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4186 int (*config)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 changed); 4187 void (*bss_info_changed)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4188 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4189 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *info, 4190 u64 changed); 4191 void (*vif_cfg_changed)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4192 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4193 u64 changed); 4194 void (*link_info_changed)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4195 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4196 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *info, 4197 u64 changed); 4198 4199 int (*start_ap)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4200 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *link_conf); 4201 void (*stop_ap)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4202 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *link_conf); 4203 4204 u64 (*prepare_multicast)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4205 struct netdev_hw_addr_list *mc_list); 4206 void (*configure_filter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4207 unsigned int changed_flags, 4208 unsigned int *total_flags, 4209 u64 multicast); 4210 void (*config_iface_filter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4211 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4212 unsigned int filter_flags, 4213 unsigned int changed_flags); 4214 int (*set_tim)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4215 bool set); 4216 int (*set_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, enum set_key_cmd cmd, 4217 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4218 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key); 4219 void (*update_tkip_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4220 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4221 struct ieee80211_key_conf *conf, 4222 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4223 u32 iv32, u16 *phase1key); 4224 void (*set_rekey_data)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4225 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4226 struct cfg80211_gtk_rekey_data *data); 4227 void (*set_default_unicast_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4228 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, int idx); 4229 int (*hw_scan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4230 struct ieee80211_scan_request *req); 4231 void (*cancel_hw_scan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4232 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4233 int (*sched_scan_start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4234 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4235 struct cfg80211_sched_scan_request *req, 4236 struct ieee80211_scan_ies *ies); 4237 int (*sched_scan_stop)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4238 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4239 void (*sw_scan_start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4240 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4241 const u8 *mac_addr); 4242 void (*sw_scan_complete)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4243 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4244 int (*get_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4245 struct ieee80211_low_level_stats *stats); 4246 void (*get_key_seq)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4247 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key, 4248 struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq); 4249 int (*set_frag_threshold)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 value); 4250 int (*set_rts_threshold)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 value); 4251 int (*sta_add)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4252 struct ieee80211_sta *sta); 4253 int (*sta_remove)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4254 struct ieee80211_sta *sta); 4255 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS 4256 void (*sta_add_debugfs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4257 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4258 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4259 struct dentry *dir); 4260 #endif 4261 void (*sta_notify)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4262 enum sta_notify_cmd, struct ieee80211_sta *sta); 4263 int (*sta_set_txpwr)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4264 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4265 struct ieee80211_sta *sta); 4266 int (*sta_state)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4267 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4268 enum ieee80211_sta_state old_state, 4269 enum ieee80211_sta_state new_state); 4270 void (*sta_pre_rcu_remove)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4271 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4272 struct ieee80211_sta *sta); 4273 void (*sta_rc_update)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4274 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4275 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4276 u32 changed); 4277 void (*sta_rate_tbl_update)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4278 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4279 struct ieee80211_sta *sta); 4280 void (*sta_statistics)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4281 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4282 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4283 struct station_info *sinfo); 4284 int (*conf_tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4285 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4286 unsigned int link_id, u16 ac, 4287 const struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params *params); 4288 u64 (*get_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4289 void (*set_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4290 u64 tsf); 4291 void (*offset_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4292 s64 offset); 4293 void (*reset_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4294 int (*tx_last_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 4295 4296 /** 4297 * @ampdu_action: 4298 * Perform a certain A-MPDU action. 4299 * The RA/TID combination determines the destination and TID we want 4300 * the ampdu action to be performed for. The action is defined through 4301 * ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action. 4302 * When the action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL the driver 4303 * may neither send aggregates containing more subframes than @buf_size 4304 * nor send aggregates in a way that lost frames would exceed the 4305 * buffer size. If just limiting the aggregate size, this would be 4306 * possible with a buf_size of 8: 4307 * 4308 * - ``TX: 1.....7`` 4309 * - ``RX: 2....7`` (lost frame #1) 4310 * - ``TX: 8..1...`` 4311 * 4312 * which is invalid since #1 was now re-transmitted well past the 4313 * buffer size of 8. Correct ways to retransmit #1 would be: 4314 * 4315 * - ``TX: 1 or`` 4316 * - ``TX: 18 or`` 4317 * - ``TX: 81`` 4318 * 4319 * Even ``189`` would be wrong since 1 could be lost again. 4320 * 4321 * Returns a negative error code on failure. The driver may return 4322 * %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START_IMMEDIATE for %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START 4323 * if the session can start immediately. 4324 * 4325 * The callback can sleep. 4326 */ 4327 int (*ampdu_action)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4328 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4329 struct ieee80211_ampdu_params *params); 4330 int (*get_survey)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int idx, 4331 struct survey_info *survey); 4332 void (*rfkill_poll)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 4333 void (*set_coverage_class)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, s16 coverage_class); 4334 #ifdef CONFIG_NL80211_TESTMODE 4335 int (*testmode_cmd)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4336 void *data, int len); 4337 int (*testmode_dump)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb, 4338 struct netlink_callback *cb, 4339 void *data, int len); 4340 #endif 4341 void (*flush)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4342 u32 queues, bool drop); 4343 void (*channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4344 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4345 struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch); 4346 int (*set_antenna)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 tx_ant, u32 rx_ant); 4347 int (*get_antenna)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 *tx_ant, u32 *rx_ant); 4348 4349 int (*remain_on_channel)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4350 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4351 struct ieee80211_channel *chan, 4352 int duration, 4353 enum ieee80211_roc_type type); 4354 int (*cancel_remain_on_channel)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4355 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4356 int (*set_ringparam)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 tx, u32 rx); 4357 void (*get_ringparam)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4358 u32 *tx, u32 *tx_max, u32 *rx, u32 *rx_max); 4359 bool (*tx_frames_pending)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 4360 int (*set_bitrate_mask)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4361 const struct cfg80211_bitrate_mask *mask); 4362 void (*event_callback)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4363 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4364 const struct ieee80211_event *event); 4365 4366 void (*allow_buffered_frames)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4367 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4368 u16 tids, int num_frames, 4369 enum ieee80211_frame_release_type reason, 4370 bool more_data); 4371 void (*release_buffered_frames)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4372 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4373 u16 tids, int num_frames, 4374 enum ieee80211_frame_release_type reason, 4375 bool more_data); 4376 4377 int (*get_et_sset_count)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4378 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, int sset); 4379 void (*get_et_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4380 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4381 struct ethtool_stats *stats, u64 *data); 4382 void (*get_et_strings)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4383 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4384 u32 sset, u8 *data); 4385 4386 void (*mgd_prepare_tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4387 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4388 struct ieee80211_prep_tx_info *info); 4389 void (*mgd_complete_tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4390 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4391 struct ieee80211_prep_tx_info *info); 4392 4393 void (*mgd_protect_tdls_discover)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4394 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4395 4396 int (*add_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4397 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx); 4398 void (*remove_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4399 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx); 4400 void (*change_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4401 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx, 4402 u32 changed); 4403 int (*assign_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4404 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4405 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *link_conf, 4406 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx); 4407 void (*unassign_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4408 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4409 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *link_conf, 4410 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx); 4411 int (*switch_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4412 struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch *vifs, 4413 int n_vifs, 4414 enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode mode); 4415 4416 void (*reconfig_complete)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4417 enum ieee80211_reconfig_type reconfig_type); 4418 4419 #if IS_ENABLED(CONFIG_IPV6) 4420 void (*ipv6_addr_change)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4421 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4422 struct inet6_dev *idev); 4423 #endif 4424 void (*channel_switch_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4425 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4426 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef); 4427 int (*pre_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4428 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4429 struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch); 4430 4431 int (*post_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4432 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4433 void (*abort_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4434 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4435 void (*channel_switch_rx_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4436 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4437 struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch); 4438 4439 int (*join_ibss)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4440 void (*leave_ibss)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4441 u32 (*get_expected_throughput)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4442 struct ieee80211_sta *sta); 4443 int (*get_txpower)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4444 int *dbm); 4445 4446 int (*tdls_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4447 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4448 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 oper_class, 4449 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef, 4450 struct sk_buff *tmpl_skb, u32 ch_sw_tm_ie); 4451 void (*tdls_cancel_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4452 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4453 struct ieee80211_sta *sta); 4454 void (*tdls_recv_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4455 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4456 struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params *params); 4457 4458 void (*wake_tx_queue)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4459 struct ieee80211_txq *txq); 4460 void (*sync_rx_queues)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 4461 4462 int (*start_nan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4463 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4464 struct cfg80211_nan_conf *conf); 4465 int (*stop_nan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4466 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4467 int (*nan_change_conf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4468 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4469 struct cfg80211_nan_conf *conf, u32 changes); 4470 int (*add_nan_func)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4471 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4472 const struct cfg80211_nan_func *nan_func); 4473 void (*del_nan_func)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4474 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4475 u8 instance_id); 4476 bool (*can_aggregate_in_amsdu)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4477 struct sk_buff *head, 4478 struct sk_buff *skb); 4479 int (*get_ftm_responder_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4480 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4481 struct cfg80211_ftm_responder_stats *ftm_stats); 4482 int (*start_pmsr)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4483 struct cfg80211_pmsr_request *request); 4484 void (*abort_pmsr)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4485 struct cfg80211_pmsr_request *request); 4486 int (*set_tid_config)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4487 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4488 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4489 struct cfg80211_tid_config *tid_conf); 4490 int (*reset_tid_config)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4491 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4492 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tids); 4493 void (*update_vif_offload)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4494 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4495 void (*sta_set_4addr)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4496 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, bool enabled); 4497 int (*set_sar_specs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4498 const struct cfg80211_sar_specs *sar); 4499 void (*sta_set_decap_offload)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4500 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4501 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, bool enabled); 4502 void (*add_twt_setup)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4503 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4504 struct ieee80211_twt_setup *twt); 4505 void (*twt_teardown_request)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4506 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 flowid); 4507 int (*set_radar_background)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4508 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef); 4509 int (*net_fill_forward_path)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4510 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4511 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4512 struct net_device_path_ctx *ctx, 4513 struct net_device_path *path); 4514 int (*change_vif_links)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4515 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4516 u16 old_links, u16 new_links, 4517 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *old[IEEE80211_MLD_MAX_NUM_LINKS]); 4518 int (*change_sta_links)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4519 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4520 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4521 u16 old_links, u16 new_links); 4522 }; 4523 4524 /** 4525 * ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm - Allocate a new hardware device 4526 * 4527 * This must be called once for each hardware device. The returned pointer 4528 * must be used to refer to this device when calling other functions. 4529 * mac80211 allocates a private data area for the driver pointed to by 4530 * @priv in &struct ieee80211_hw, the size of this area is given as 4531 * @priv_data_len. 4532 * 4533 * @priv_data_len: length of private data 4534 * @ops: callbacks for this device 4535 * @requested_name: Requested name for this device. 4536 * NULL is valid value, and means use the default naming (phy%d) 4537 * 4538 * Return: A pointer to the new hardware device, or %NULL on error. 4539 */ 4540 struct ieee80211_hw *ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm(size_t priv_data_len, 4541 const struct ieee80211_ops *ops, 4542 const char *requested_name); 4543 4544 /** 4545 * ieee80211_alloc_hw - Allocate a new hardware device 4546 * 4547 * This must be called once for each hardware device. The returned pointer 4548 * must be used to refer to this device when calling other functions. 4549 * mac80211 allocates a private data area for the driver pointed to by 4550 * @priv in &struct ieee80211_hw, the size of this area is given as 4551 * @priv_data_len. 4552 * 4553 * @priv_data_len: length of private data 4554 * @ops: callbacks for this device 4555 * 4556 * Return: A pointer to the new hardware device, or %NULL on error. 4557 */ 4558 static inline 4559 struct ieee80211_hw *ieee80211_alloc_hw(size_t priv_data_len, 4560 const struct ieee80211_ops *ops) 4561 { 4562 return ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm(priv_data_len, ops, NULL); 4563 } 4564 4565 /** 4566 * ieee80211_register_hw - Register hardware device 4567 * 4568 * You must call this function before any other functions in 4569 * mac80211. Note that before a hardware can be registered, you 4570 * need to fill the contained wiphy's information. 4571 * 4572 * @hw: the device to register as returned by ieee80211_alloc_hw() 4573 * 4574 * Return: 0 on success. An error code otherwise. 4575 */ 4576 int ieee80211_register_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 4577 4578 /** 4579 * struct ieee80211_tpt_blink - throughput blink description 4580 * @throughput: throughput in Kbit/sec 4581 * @blink_time: blink time in milliseconds 4582 * (full cycle, ie. one off + one on period) 4583 */ 4584 struct ieee80211_tpt_blink { 4585 int throughput; 4586 int blink_time; 4587 }; 4588 4589 /** 4590 * enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags - throughput trigger flags 4591 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_RADIO: enable blinking with radio 4592 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_WORK: enable blinking when working 4593 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_CONNECTED: enable blinking when at least one 4594 * interface is connected in some way, including being an AP 4595 */ 4596 enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags { 4597 IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_RADIO = BIT(0), 4598 IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_WORK = BIT(1), 4599 IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_CONNECTED = BIT(2), 4600 }; 4601 4602 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS 4603 const char *__ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 4604 const char *__ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 4605 const char *__ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 4606 const char *__ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 4607 const char * 4608 __ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4609 unsigned int flags, 4610 const struct ieee80211_tpt_blink *blink_table, 4611 unsigned int blink_table_len); 4612 #endif 4613 /** 4614 * ieee80211_get_tx_led_name - get name of TX LED 4615 * 4616 * mac80211 creates a transmit LED trigger for each wireless hardware 4617 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device. 4618 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs) 4619 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device. 4620 * 4621 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for 4622 * 4623 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs. 4624 */ 4625 static inline const char *ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw) 4626 { 4627 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS 4628 return __ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(hw); 4629 #else 4630 return NULL; 4631 #endif 4632 } 4633 4634 /** 4635 * ieee80211_get_rx_led_name - get name of RX LED 4636 * 4637 * mac80211 creates a receive LED trigger for each wireless hardware 4638 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device. 4639 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs) 4640 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device. 4641 * 4642 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for 4643 * 4644 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs. 4645 */ 4646 static inline const char *ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw) 4647 { 4648 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS 4649 return __ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(hw); 4650 #else 4651 return NULL; 4652 #endif 4653 } 4654 4655 /** 4656 * ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name - get name of association LED 4657 * 4658 * mac80211 creates a association LED trigger for each wireless hardware 4659 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device. 4660 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs) 4661 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device. 4662 * 4663 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for 4664 * 4665 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs. 4666 */ 4667 static inline const char *ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw) 4668 { 4669 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS 4670 return __ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(hw); 4671 #else 4672 return NULL; 4673 #endif 4674 } 4675 4676 /** 4677 * ieee80211_get_radio_led_name - get name of radio LED 4678 * 4679 * mac80211 creates a radio change LED trigger for each wireless hardware 4680 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device. 4681 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs) 4682 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device. 4683 * 4684 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for 4685 * 4686 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs. 4687 */ 4688 static inline const char *ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw) 4689 { 4690 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS 4691 return __ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(hw); 4692 #else 4693 return NULL; 4694 #endif 4695 } 4696 4697 /** 4698 * ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger - create throughput LED trigger 4699 * @hw: the hardware to create the trigger for 4700 * @flags: trigger flags, see &enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags 4701 * @blink_table: the blink table -- needs to be ordered by throughput 4702 * @blink_table_len: size of the blink table 4703 * 4704 * Return: %NULL (in case of error, or if no LED triggers are 4705 * configured) or the name of the new trigger. 4706 * 4707 * Note: This function must be called before ieee80211_register_hw(). 4708 */ 4709 static inline const char * 4710 ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, unsigned int flags, 4711 const struct ieee80211_tpt_blink *blink_table, 4712 unsigned int blink_table_len) 4713 { 4714 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS 4715 return __ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(hw, flags, blink_table, 4716 blink_table_len); 4717 #else 4718 return NULL; 4719 #endif 4720 } 4721 4722 /** 4723 * ieee80211_unregister_hw - Unregister a hardware device 4724 * 4725 * This function instructs mac80211 to free allocated resources 4726 * and unregister netdevices from the networking subsystem. 4727 * 4728 * @hw: the hardware to unregister 4729 */ 4730 void ieee80211_unregister_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 4731 4732 /** 4733 * ieee80211_free_hw - free hardware descriptor 4734 * 4735 * This function frees everything that was allocated, including the 4736 * private data for the driver. You must call ieee80211_unregister_hw() 4737 * before calling this function. 4738 * 4739 * @hw: the hardware to free 4740 */ 4741 void ieee80211_free_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 4742 4743 /** 4744 * ieee80211_restart_hw - restart hardware completely 4745 * 4746 * Call this function when the hardware was restarted for some reason 4747 * (hardware error, ...) and the driver is unable to restore its state 4748 * by itself. mac80211 assumes that at this point the driver/hardware 4749 * is completely uninitialised and stopped, it starts the process by 4750 * calling the ->start() operation. The driver will need to reset all 4751 * internal state that it has prior to calling this function. 4752 * 4753 * @hw: the hardware to restart 4754 */ 4755 void ieee80211_restart_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 4756 4757 /** 4758 * ieee80211_rx_list - receive frame and store processed skbs in a list 4759 * 4760 * Use this function to hand received frames to mac80211. The receive 4761 * buffer in @skb must start with an IEEE 802.11 header. In case of a 4762 * paged @skb is used, the driver is recommended to put the ieee80211 4763 * header of the frame on the linear part of the @skb to avoid memory 4764 * allocation and/or memcpy by the stack. 4765 * 4766 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function 4767 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls to 4768 * this function, ieee80211_rx_ni() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may not be 4769 * mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with 4770 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni(). 4771 * 4772 * This function must be called with BHs disabled and RCU read lock 4773 * 4774 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on 4775 * @sta: the station the frame was received from, or %NULL 4776 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call 4777 * @list: the destination list 4778 */ 4779 void ieee80211_rx_list(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4780 struct sk_buff *skb, struct list_head *list); 4781 4782 /** 4783 * ieee80211_rx_napi - receive frame from NAPI context 4784 * 4785 * Use this function to hand received frames to mac80211. The receive 4786 * buffer in @skb must start with an IEEE 802.11 header. In case of a 4787 * paged @skb is used, the driver is recommended to put the ieee80211 4788 * header of the frame on the linear part of the @skb to avoid memory 4789 * allocation and/or memcpy by the stack. 4790 * 4791 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function 4792 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls to 4793 * this function, ieee80211_rx_ni() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may not be 4794 * mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with 4795 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni(). 4796 * 4797 * This function must be called with BHs disabled. 4798 * 4799 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on 4800 * @sta: the station the frame was received from, or %NULL 4801 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call 4802 * @napi: the NAPI context 4803 */ 4804 void ieee80211_rx_napi(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4805 struct sk_buff *skb, struct napi_struct *napi); 4806 4807 /** 4808 * ieee80211_rx - receive frame 4809 * 4810 * Use this function to hand received frames to mac80211. The receive 4811 * buffer in @skb must start with an IEEE 802.11 header. In case of a 4812 * paged @skb is used, the driver is recommended to put the ieee80211 4813 * header of the frame on the linear part of the @skb to avoid memory 4814 * allocation and/or memcpy by the stack. 4815 * 4816 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function 4817 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls to 4818 * this function, ieee80211_rx_ni() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may not be 4819 * mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with 4820 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni(). 4821 * 4822 * In process context use instead ieee80211_rx_ni(). 4823 * 4824 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on 4825 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call 4826 */ 4827 static inline void ieee80211_rx(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb) 4828 { 4829 ieee80211_rx_napi(hw, NULL, skb, NULL); 4830 } 4831 4832 /** 4833 * ieee80211_rx_irqsafe - receive frame 4834 * 4835 * Like ieee80211_rx() but can be called in IRQ context 4836 * (internally defers to a tasklet.) 4837 * 4838 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_rx() or ieee80211_rx_ni() may not 4839 * be mixed for a single hardware.Must not run concurrently with 4840 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni(). 4841 * 4842 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on 4843 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call 4844 */ 4845 void ieee80211_rx_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb); 4846 4847 /** 4848 * ieee80211_rx_ni - receive frame (in process context) 4849 * 4850 * Like ieee80211_rx() but can be called in process context 4851 * (internally disables bottom halves). 4852 * 4853 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_rx() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may 4854 * not be mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with 4855 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni(). 4856 * 4857 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on 4858 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call 4859 */ 4860 static inline void ieee80211_rx_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4861 struct sk_buff *skb) 4862 { 4863 local_bh_disable(); 4864 ieee80211_rx(hw, skb); 4865 local_bh_enable(); 4866 } 4867 4868 /** 4869 * ieee80211_sta_ps_transition - PS transition for connected sta 4870 * 4871 * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS 4872 * flag set, use this function to inform mac80211 about a connected station 4873 * entering/leaving PS mode. 4874 * 4875 * This function may not be called in IRQ context or with softirqs enabled. 4876 * 4877 * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized against 4878 * each other. 4879 * 4880 * @sta: currently connected sta 4881 * @start: start or stop PS 4882 * 4883 * Return: 0 on success. -EINVAL when the requested PS mode is already set. 4884 */ 4885 int ieee80211_sta_ps_transition(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, bool start); 4886 4887 /** 4888 * ieee80211_sta_ps_transition_ni - PS transition for connected sta 4889 * (in process context) 4890 * 4891 * Like ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() but can be called in process context 4892 * (internally disables bottom halves). Concurrent call restriction still 4893 * applies. 4894 * 4895 * @sta: currently connected sta 4896 * @start: start or stop PS 4897 * 4898 * Return: Like ieee80211_sta_ps_transition(). 4899 */ 4900 static inline int ieee80211_sta_ps_transition_ni(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4901 bool start) 4902 { 4903 int ret; 4904 4905 local_bh_disable(); 4906 ret = ieee80211_sta_ps_transition(sta, start); 4907 local_bh_enable(); 4908 4909 return ret; 4910 } 4911 4912 /** 4913 * ieee80211_sta_pspoll - PS-Poll frame received 4914 * @sta: currently connected station 4915 * 4916 * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS flag set, 4917 * use this function to inform mac80211 that a PS-Poll frame from a 4918 * connected station was received. 4919 * This must be used in conjunction with ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() 4920 * and possibly ieee80211_sta_uapsd_trigger(); calls to all three must 4921 * be serialized. 4922 */ 4923 void ieee80211_sta_pspoll(struct ieee80211_sta *sta); 4924 4925 /** 4926 * ieee80211_sta_uapsd_trigger - (potential) U-APSD trigger frame received 4927 * @sta: currently connected station 4928 * @tid: TID of the received (potential) trigger frame 4929 * 4930 * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS flag set, 4931 * use this function to inform mac80211 that a (potential) trigger frame 4932 * from a connected station was received. 4933 * This must be used in conjunction with ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() 4934 * and possibly ieee80211_sta_pspoll(); calls to all three must be 4935 * serialized. 4936 * %IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS can be passed as the tid if the tid is unknown. 4937 * In this case, mac80211 will not check that this tid maps to an AC 4938 * that is trigger enabled and assume that the caller did the proper 4939 * checks. 4940 */ 4941 void ieee80211_sta_uapsd_trigger(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid); 4942 4943 /* 4944 * The TX headroom reserved by mac80211 for its own tx_status functions. 4945 * This is enough for the radiotap header. 4946 */ 4947 #define IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_HEADROOM ALIGN(14, 4) 4948 4949 /** 4950 * ieee80211_sta_set_buffered - inform mac80211 about driver-buffered frames 4951 * @sta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer for the sleeping station 4952 * @tid: the TID that has buffered frames 4953 * @buffered: indicates whether or not frames are buffered for this TID 4954 * 4955 * If a driver buffers frames for a powersave station instead of passing 4956 * them back to mac80211 for retransmission, the station may still need 4957 * to be told that there are buffered frames via the TIM bit. 4958 * 4959 * This function informs mac80211 whether or not there are frames that are 4960 * buffered in the driver for a given TID; mac80211 can then use this data 4961 * to set the TIM bit (NOTE: This may call back into the driver's set_tim 4962 * call! Beware of the locking!) 4963 * 4964 * If all frames are released to the station (due to PS-poll or uAPSD) 4965 * then the driver needs to inform mac80211 that there no longer are 4966 * frames buffered. However, when the station wakes up mac80211 assumes 4967 * that all buffered frames will be transmitted and clears this data, 4968 * drivers need to make sure they inform mac80211 about all buffered 4969 * frames on the sleep transition (sta_notify() with %STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP). 4970 * 4971 * Note that technically mac80211 only needs to know this per AC, not per 4972 * TID, but since driver buffering will inevitably happen per TID (since 4973 * it is related to aggregation) it is easier to make mac80211 map the 4974 * TID to the AC as required instead of keeping track in all drivers that 4975 * use this API. 4976 */ 4977 void ieee80211_sta_set_buffered(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4978 u8 tid, bool buffered); 4979 4980 /** 4981 * ieee80211_get_tx_rates - get the selected transmit rates for a packet 4982 * 4983 * Call this function in a driver with per-packet rate selection support 4984 * to combine the rate info in the packet tx info with the most recent 4985 * rate selection table for the station entry. 4986 * 4987 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 4988 * @sta: the receiver station to which this packet is sent. 4989 * @skb: the frame to be transmitted. 4990 * @dest: buffer for extracted rate/retry information 4991 * @max_rates: maximum number of rates to fetch 4992 */ 4993 void ieee80211_get_tx_rates(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4994 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4995 struct sk_buff *skb, 4996 struct ieee80211_tx_rate *dest, 4997 int max_rates); 4998 4999 /** 5000 * ieee80211_sta_set_expected_throughput - set the expected tpt for a station 5001 * 5002 * Call this function to notify mac80211 about a change in expected throughput 5003 * to a station. A driver for a device that does rate control in firmware can 5004 * call this function when the expected throughput estimate towards a station 5005 * changes. The information is used to tune the CoDel AQM applied to traffic 5006 * going towards that station (which can otherwise be too aggressive and cause 5007 * slow stations to starve). 5008 * 5009 * @pubsta: the station to set throughput for. 5010 * @thr: the current expected throughput in kbps. 5011 */ 5012 void ieee80211_sta_set_expected_throughput(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, 5013 u32 thr); 5014 5015 /** 5016 * ieee80211_tx_rate_update - transmit rate update callback 5017 * 5018 * Drivers should call this functions with a non-NULL pub sta 5019 * This function can be used in drivers that does not have provision 5020 * in updating the tx rate in data path. 5021 * 5022 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by 5023 * @pubsta: the station to update the tx rate for. 5024 * @info: tx status information 5025 */ 5026 void ieee80211_tx_rate_update(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5027 struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, 5028 struct ieee80211_tx_info *info); 5029 5030 /** 5031 * ieee80211_tx_status - transmit status callback 5032 * 5033 * Call this function for all transmitted frames after they have been 5034 * transmitted. It is permissible to not call this function for 5035 * multicast frames but this can affect statistics. 5036 * 5037 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function 5038 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls 5039 * to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni() and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() 5040 * may not be mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with 5041 * ieee80211_rx() or ieee80211_rx_ni(). 5042 * 5043 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by 5044 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call 5045 */ 5046 void ieee80211_tx_status(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5047 struct sk_buff *skb); 5048 5049 /** 5050 * ieee80211_tx_status_ext - extended transmit status callback 5051 * 5052 * This function can be used as a replacement for ieee80211_tx_status 5053 * in drivers that may want to provide extra information that does not 5054 * fit into &struct ieee80211_tx_info. 5055 * 5056 * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized 5057 * against each other. Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni() 5058 * and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed for a single hardware. 5059 * 5060 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by 5061 * @status: tx status information 5062 */ 5063 void ieee80211_tx_status_ext(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5064 struct ieee80211_tx_status *status); 5065 5066 /** 5067 * ieee80211_tx_status_noskb - transmit status callback without skb 5068 * 5069 * This function can be used as a replacement for ieee80211_tx_status 5070 * in drivers that cannot reliably map tx status information back to 5071 * specific skbs. 5072 * 5073 * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized 5074 * against each other. Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni() 5075 * and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed for a single hardware. 5076 * 5077 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by 5078 * @sta: the receiver station to which this packet is sent 5079 * (NULL for multicast packets) 5080 * @info: tx status information 5081 */ 5082 static inline void ieee80211_tx_status_noskb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5083 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 5084 struct ieee80211_tx_info *info) 5085 { 5086 struct ieee80211_tx_status status = { 5087 .sta = sta, 5088 .info = info, 5089 }; 5090 5091 ieee80211_tx_status_ext(hw, &status); 5092 } 5093 5094 /** 5095 * ieee80211_tx_status_ni - transmit status callback (in process context) 5096 * 5097 * Like ieee80211_tx_status() but can be called in process context. 5098 * 5099 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status() and 5100 * ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed 5101 * for a single hardware. 5102 * 5103 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by 5104 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call 5105 */ 5106 static inline void ieee80211_tx_status_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5107 struct sk_buff *skb) 5108 { 5109 local_bh_disable(); 5110 ieee80211_tx_status(hw, skb); 5111 local_bh_enable(); 5112 } 5113 5114 /** 5115 * ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe - IRQ-safe transmit status callback 5116 * 5117 * Like ieee80211_tx_status() but can be called in IRQ context 5118 * (internally defers to a tasklet.) 5119 * 5120 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status() and 5121 * ieee80211_tx_status_ni() may not be mixed for a single hardware. 5122 * 5123 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by 5124 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call 5125 */ 5126 void ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5127 struct sk_buff *skb); 5128 5129 /** 5130 * ieee80211_tx_status_8023 - transmit status callback for 802.3 frame format 5131 * 5132 * Call this function for all transmitted data frames after their transmit 5133 * completion. This callback should only be called for data frames which 5134 * are using driver's (or hardware's) offload capability of encap/decap 5135 * 802.11 frames. 5136 * 5137 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function 5138 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other and all 5139 * calls in the same tx status family. 5140 * 5141 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by 5142 * @vif: the interface for which the frame was transmitted 5143 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call 5144 */ 5145 void ieee80211_tx_status_8023(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5146 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5147 struct sk_buff *skb); 5148 5149 /** 5150 * ieee80211_report_low_ack - report non-responding station 5151 * 5152 * When operating in AP-mode, call this function to report a non-responding 5153 * connected STA. 5154 * 5155 * @sta: the non-responding connected sta 5156 * @num_packets: number of packets sent to @sta without a response 5157 */ 5158 void ieee80211_report_low_ack(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u32 num_packets); 5159 5160 #define IEEE80211_MAX_CNTDWN_COUNTERS_NUM 2 5161 5162 /** 5163 * struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets - mutable beacon offsets 5164 * @tim_offset: position of TIM element 5165 * @tim_length: size of TIM element 5166 * @cntdwn_counter_offs: array of IEEE80211_MAX_CNTDWN_COUNTERS_NUM offsets 5167 * to countdown counters. This array can contain zero values which 5168 * should be ignored. 5169 * @mbssid_off: position of the multiple bssid element 5170 */ 5171 struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets { 5172 u16 tim_offset; 5173 u16 tim_length; 5174 5175 u16 cntdwn_counter_offs[IEEE80211_MAX_CNTDWN_COUNTERS_NUM]; 5176 u16 mbssid_off; 5177 }; 5178 5179 /** 5180 * ieee80211_beacon_get_template - beacon template generation function 5181 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5182 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5183 * @offs: &struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets pointer to struct that will 5184 * receive the offsets that may be updated by the driver. 5185 * @link_id: the link id to which the beacon belongs (or 0 for a non-MLD AP) 5186 * 5187 * If the driver implements beaconing modes, it must use this function to 5188 * obtain the beacon template. 5189 * 5190 * This function should be used if the beacon frames are generated by the 5191 * device, and then the driver must use the returned beacon as the template 5192 * The driver or the device are responsible to update the DTIM and, when 5193 * applicable, the CSA count. 5194 * 5195 * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb. 5196 * 5197 * Return: The beacon template. %NULL on error. 5198 */ 5199 struct sk_buff * 5200 ieee80211_beacon_get_template(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5201 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5202 struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets *offs, 5203 unsigned int link_id); 5204 5205 /** 5206 * ieee80211_beacon_get_tim - beacon generation function 5207 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5208 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5209 * @tim_offset: pointer to variable that will receive the TIM IE offset. 5210 * Set to 0 if invalid (in non-AP modes). 5211 * @tim_length: pointer to variable that will receive the TIM IE length, 5212 * (including the ID and length bytes!). 5213 * Set to 0 if invalid (in non-AP modes). 5214 * @link_id: the link id to which the beacon belongs (or 0 for a non-MLD AP) 5215 * 5216 * If the driver implements beaconing modes, it must use this function to 5217 * obtain the beacon frame. 5218 * 5219 * If the beacon frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in 5220 * hardware/firmware), the driver uses this function to get each beacon 5221 * frame from mac80211 -- it is responsible for calling this function exactly 5222 * once before the beacon is needed (e.g. based on hardware interrupt). 5223 * 5224 * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb. 5225 * 5226 * Return: The beacon template. %NULL on error. 5227 */ 5228 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5229 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5230 u16 *tim_offset, u16 *tim_length, 5231 unsigned int link_id); 5232 5233 /** 5234 * ieee80211_beacon_get - beacon generation function 5235 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5236 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5237 * @link_id: the link id to which the beacon belongs (or 0 for a non-MLD AP) 5238 * 5239 * See ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(). 5240 * 5241 * Return: See ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(). 5242 */ 5243 static inline struct sk_buff *ieee80211_beacon_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5244 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5245 unsigned int link_id) 5246 { 5247 return ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(hw, vif, NULL, NULL, link_id); 5248 } 5249 5250 /** 5251 * ieee80211_beacon_update_cntdwn - request mac80211 to decrement the beacon countdown 5252 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5253 * 5254 * The beacon counter should be updated after each beacon transmission. 5255 * This function is called implicitly when 5256 * ieee80211_beacon_get/ieee80211_beacon_get_tim are called, however if the 5257 * beacon frames are generated by the device, the driver should call this 5258 * function after each beacon transmission to sync mac80211's beacon countdown. 5259 * 5260 * Return: new countdown value 5261 */ 5262 u8 ieee80211_beacon_update_cntdwn(struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 5263 5264 /** 5265 * ieee80211_beacon_set_cntdwn - request mac80211 to set beacon countdown 5266 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5267 * @counter: the new value for the counter 5268 * 5269 * The beacon countdown can be changed by the device, this API should be 5270 * used by the device driver to update csa counter in mac80211. 5271 * 5272 * It should never be used together with ieee80211_beacon_update_cntdwn(), 5273 * as it will cause a race condition around the counter value. 5274 */ 5275 void ieee80211_beacon_set_cntdwn(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u8 counter); 5276 5277 /** 5278 * ieee80211_csa_finish - notify mac80211 about channel switch 5279 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5280 * 5281 * After a channel switch announcement was scheduled and the counter in this 5282 * announcement hits 1, this function must be called by the driver to 5283 * notify mac80211 that the channel can be changed. 5284 */ 5285 void ieee80211_csa_finish(struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 5286 5287 /** 5288 * ieee80211_beacon_cntdwn_is_complete - find out if countdown reached 1 5289 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5290 * 5291 * This function returns whether the countdown reached zero. 5292 */ 5293 bool ieee80211_beacon_cntdwn_is_complete(struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 5294 5295 /** 5296 * ieee80211_color_change_finish - notify mac80211 about color change 5297 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5298 * 5299 * After a color change announcement was scheduled and the counter in this 5300 * announcement hits 1, this function must be called by the driver to 5301 * notify mac80211 that the color can be changed 5302 */ 5303 void ieee80211_color_change_finish(struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 5304 5305 /** 5306 * ieee80211_proberesp_get - retrieve a Probe Response template 5307 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5308 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5309 * 5310 * Creates a Probe Response template which can, for example, be uploaded to 5311 * hardware. The destination address should be set by the caller. 5312 * 5313 * Can only be called in AP mode. 5314 * 5315 * Return: The Probe Response template. %NULL on error. 5316 */ 5317 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_proberesp_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5318 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 5319 5320 /** 5321 * ieee80211_pspoll_get - retrieve a PS Poll template 5322 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5323 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5324 * 5325 * Creates a PS Poll a template which can, for example, uploaded to 5326 * hardware. The template must be updated after association so that correct 5327 * AID, BSSID and MAC address is used. 5328 * 5329 * Note: Caller (or hardware) is responsible for setting the 5330 * &IEEE80211_FCTL_PM bit. 5331 * 5332 * Return: The PS Poll template. %NULL on error. 5333 */ 5334 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_pspoll_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5335 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 5336 5337 /** 5338 * ieee80211_nullfunc_get - retrieve a nullfunc template 5339 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5340 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5341 * @link_id: If the vif is an MLD, get a frame with the link addresses 5342 * for the given link ID. For a link_id < 0 you get a frame with 5343 * MLD addresses, however useful that might be. 5344 * @qos_ok: QoS NDP is acceptable to the caller, this should be set 5345 * if at all possible 5346 * 5347 * Creates a Nullfunc template which can, for example, uploaded to 5348 * hardware. The template must be updated after association so that correct 5349 * BSSID and address is used. 5350 * 5351 * If @qos_ndp is set and the association is to an AP with QoS/WMM, the 5352 * returned packet will be QoS NDP. 5353 * 5354 * Note: Caller (or hardware) is responsible for setting the 5355 * &IEEE80211_FCTL_PM bit as well as Duration and Sequence Control fields. 5356 * 5357 * Return: The nullfunc template. %NULL on error. 5358 */ 5359 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_nullfunc_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5360 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5361 int link_id, bool qos_ok); 5362 5363 /** 5364 * ieee80211_probereq_get - retrieve a Probe Request template 5365 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5366 * @src_addr: source MAC address 5367 * @ssid: SSID buffer 5368 * @ssid_len: length of SSID 5369 * @tailroom: tailroom to reserve at end of SKB for IEs 5370 * 5371 * Creates a Probe Request template which can, for example, be uploaded to 5372 * hardware. 5373 * 5374 * Return: The Probe Request template. %NULL on error. 5375 */ 5376 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_probereq_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5377 const u8 *src_addr, 5378 const u8 *ssid, size_t ssid_len, 5379 size_t tailroom); 5380 5381 /** 5382 * ieee80211_rts_get - RTS frame generation function 5383 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5384 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5385 * @frame: pointer to the frame that is going to be protected by the RTS. 5386 * @frame_len: the frame length (in octets). 5387 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame. 5388 * @rts: The buffer where to store the RTS frame. 5389 * 5390 * If the RTS frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in 5391 * hardware/firmware), the low-level driver uses this function to receive 5392 * the next RTS frame from the 802.11 code. The low-level is responsible 5393 * for calling this function before and RTS frame is needed. 5394 */ 5395 void ieee80211_rts_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5396 const void *frame, size_t frame_len, 5397 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl, 5398 struct ieee80211_rts *rts); 5399 5400 /** 5401 * ieee80211_rts_duration - Get the duration field for an RTS frame 5402 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5403 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5404 * @frame_len: the length of the frame that is going to be protected by the RTS. 5405 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame. 5406 * 5407 * If the RTS is generated in firmware, but the host system must provide 5408 * the duration field, the low-level driver uses this function to receive 5409 * the duration field value in little-endian byteorder. 5410 * 5411 * Return: The duration. 5412 */ 5413 __le16 ieee80211_rts_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5414 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, size_t frame_len, 5415 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl); 5416 5417 /** 5418 * ieee80211_ctstoself_get - CTS-to-self frame generation function 5419 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5420 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5421 * @frame: pointer to the frame that is going to be protected by the CTS-to-self. 5422 * @frame_len: the frame length (in octets). 5423 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame. 5424 * @cts: The buffer where to store the CTS-to-self frame. 5425 * 5426 * If the CTS-to-self frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in 5427 * hardware/firmware), the low-level driver uses this function to receive 5428 * the next CTS-to-self frame from the 802.11 code. The low-level is responsible 5429 * for calling this function before and CTS-to-self frame is needed. 5430 */ 5431 void ieee80211_ctstoself_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5432 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5433 const void *frame, size_t frame_len, 5434 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl, 5435 struct ieee80211_cts *cts); 5436 5437 /** 5438 * ieee80211_ctstoself_duration - Get the duration field for a CTS-to-self frame 5439 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5440 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5441 * @frame_len: the length of the frame that is going to be protected by the CTS-to-self. 5442 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame. 5443 * 5444 * If the CTS-to-self is generated in firmware, but the host system must provide 5445 * the duration field, the low-level driver uses this function to receive 5446 * the duration field value in little-endian byteorder. 5447 * 5448 * Return: The duration. 5449 */ 5450 __le16 ieee80211_ctstoself_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5451 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5452 size_t frame_len, 5453 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl); 5454 5455 /** 5456 * ieee80211_generic_frame_duration - Calculate the duration field for a frame 5457 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5458 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5459 * @band: the band to calculate the frame duration on 5460 * @frame_len: the length of the frame. 5461 * @rate: the rate at which the frame is going to be transmitted. 5462 * 5463 * Calculate the duration field of some generic frame, given its 5464 * length and transmission rate (in 100kbps). 5465 * 5466 * Return: The duration. 5467 */ 5468 __le16 ieee80211_generic_frame_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5469 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5470 enum nl80211_band band, 5471 size_t frame_len, 5472 struct ieee80211_rate *rate); 5473 5474 /** 5475 * ieee80211_get_buffered_bc - accessing buffered broadcast and multicast frames 5476 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5477 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5478 * 5479 * Function for accessing buffered broadcast and multicast frames. If 5480 * hardware/firmware does not implement buffering of broadcast/multicast 5481 * frames when power saving is used, 802.11 code buffers them in the host 5482 * memory. The low-level driver uses this function to fetch next buffered 5483 * frame. In most cases, this is used when generating beacon frame. 5484 * 5485 * Return: A pointer to the next buffered skb or NULL if no more buffered 5486 * frames are available. 5487 * 5488 * Note: buffered frames are returned only after DTIM beacon frame was 5489 * generated with ieee80211_beacon_get() and the low-level driver must thus 5490 * call ieee80211_beacon_get() first. ieee80211_get_buffered_bc() returns 5491 * NULL if the previous generated beacon was not DTIM, so the low-level driver 5492 * does not need to check for DTIM beacons separately and should be able to 5493 * use common code for all beacons. 5494 */ 5495 struct sk_buff * 5496 ieee80211_get_buffered_bc(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 5497 5498 /** 5499 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv - get a TKIP phase 1 key for IV32 5500 * 5501 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the given IV32. 5502 * 5503 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key 5504 * @iv32: IV32 to get the P1K for 5505 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values 5506 */ 5507 void ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf, 5508 u32 iv32, u16 *p1k); 5509 5510 /** 5511 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k - get a TKIP phase 1 key 5512 * 5513 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the IV32 taken 5514 * from the given packet. 5515 * 5516 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key 5517 * @skb: the packet to take the IV32 value from that will be encrypted 5518 * with this P1K 5519 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values 5520 */ 5521 static inline void ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf, 5522 struct sk_buff *skb, u16 *p1k) 5523 { 5524 struct ieee80211_hdr *hdr = (struct ieee80211_hdr *)skb->data; 5525 const u8 *data = (u8 *)hdr + ieee80211_hdrlen(hdr->frame_control); 5526 u32 iv32 = get_unaligned_le32(&data[4]); 5527 5528 ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv(keyconf, iv32, p1k); 5529 } 5530 5531 /** 5532 * ieee80211_get_tkip_rx_p1k - get a TKIP phase 1 key for RX 5533 * 5534 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the given IV32 5535 * and transmitter address. 5536 * 5537 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key 5538 * @ta: TA that will be used with the key 5539 * @iv32: IV32 to get the P1K for 5540 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values 5541 */ 5542 void ieee80211_get_tkip_rx_p1k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf, 5543 const u8 *ta, u32 iv32, u16 *p1k); 5544 5545 /** 5546 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p2k - get a TKIP phase 2 key 5547 * 5548 * This function computes the TKIP RC4 key for the IV values 5549 * in the packet. 5550 * 5551 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key 5552 * @skb: the packet to take the IV32/IV16 values from that will be 5553 * encrypted with this key 5554 * @p2k: a buffer to which the key will be written, 16 bytes 5555 */ 5556 void ieee80211_get_tkip_p2k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf, 5557 struct sk_buff *skb, u8 *p2k); 5558 5559 /** 5560 * ieee80211_tkip_add_iv - write TKIP IV and Ext. IV to pos 5561 * 5562 * @pos: start of crypto header 5563 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key 5564 * @pn: PN to add 5565 * 5566 * Returns: pointer to the octet following IVs (i.e. beginning of 5567 * the packet payload) 5568 * 5569 * This function writes the tkip IV value to pos (which should 5570 * point to the crypto header) 5571 */ 5572 u8 *ieee80211_tkip_add_iv(u8 *pos, struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf, u64 pn); 5573 5574 /** 5575 * ieee80211_get_key_rx_seq - get key RX sequence counter 5576 * 5577 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key 5578 * @tid: The TID, or -1 for the management frame value (CCMP/GCMP only); 5579 * the value on TID 0 is also used for non-QoS frames. For 5580 * CMAC, only TID 0 is valid. 5581 * @seq: buffer to receive the sequence data 5582 * 5583 * This function allows a driver to retrieve the current RX IV/PNs 5584 * for the given key. It must not be called if IV checking is done 5585 * by the device and not by mac80211. 5586 * 5587 * Note that this function may only be called when no RX processing 5588 * can be done concurrently. 5589 */ 5590 void ieee80211_get_key_rx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf, 5591 int tid, struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq); 5592 5593 /** 5594 * ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq - set key RX sequence counter 5595 * 5596 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key 5597 * @tid: The TID, or -1 for the management frame value (CCMP/GCMP only); 5598 * the value on TID 0 is also used for non-QoS frames. For 5599 * CMAC, only TID 0 is valid. 5600 * @seq: new sequence data 5601 * 5602 * This function allows a driver to set the current RX IV/PNs for the 5603 * given key. This is useful when resuming from WoWLAN sleep and GTK 5604 * rekey may have been done while suspended. It should not be called 5605 * if IV checking is done by the device and not by mac80211. 5606 * 5607 * Note that this function may only be called when no RX processing 5608 * can be done concurrently. 5609 */ 5610 void ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf, 5611 int tid, struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq); 5612 5613 /** 5614 * ieee80211_remove_key - remove the given key 5615 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key 5616 * 5617 * Remove the given key. If the key was uploaded to the hardware at the 5618 * time this function is called, it is not deleted in the hardware but 5619 * instead assumed to have been removed already. 5620 * 5621 * Note that due to locking considerations this function can (currently) 5622 * only be called during key iteration (ieee80211_iter_keys().) 5623 */ 5624 void ieee80211_remove_key(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf); 5625 5626 /** 5627 * ieee80211_gtk_rekey_add - add a GTK key from rekeying during WoWLAN 5628 * @vif: the virtual interface to add the key on 5629 * @keyconf: new key data 5630 * 5631 * When GTK rekeying was done while the system was suspended, (a) new 5632 * key(s) will be available. These will be needed by mac80211 for proper 5633 * RX processing, so this function allows setting them. 5634 * 5635 * The function returns the newly allocated key structure, which will 5636 * have similar contents to the passed key configuration but point to 5637 * mac80211-owned memory. In case of errors, the function returns an 5638 * ERR_PTR(), use IS_ERR() etc. 5639 * 5640 * Note that this function assumes the key isn't added to hardware 5641 * acceleration, so no TX will be done with the key. Since it's a GTK 5642 * on managed (station) networks, this is true anyway. If the driver 5643 * calls this function from the resume callback and subsequently uses 5644 * the return code 1 to reconfigure the device, this key will be part 5645 * of the reconfiguration. 5646 * 5647 * Note that the driver should also call ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq() 5648 * for the new key for each TID to set up sequence counters properly. 5649 * 5650 * IMPORTANT: If this replaces a key that is present in the hardware, 5651 * then it will attempt to remove it during this call. In many cases 5652 * this isn't what you want, so call ieee80211_remove_key() first for 5653 * the key that's being replaced. 5654 */ 5655 struct ieee80211_key_conf * 5656 ieee80211_gtk_rekey_add(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5657 struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf); 5658 5659 /** 5660 * ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify - notify userspace supplicant of rekeying 5661 * @vif: virtual interface the rekeying was done on 5662 * @bssid: The BSSID of the AP, for checking association 5663 * @replay_ctr: the new replay counter after GTK rekeying 5664 * @gfp: allocation flags 5665 */ 5666 void ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *bssid, 5667 const u8 *replay_ctr, gfp_t gfp); 5668 5669 /** 5670 * ieee80211_key_mic_failure - increment MIC failure counter for the key 5671 * 5672 * Note: this is really only safe if no other RX function is called 5673 * at the same time. 5674 * 5675 * @keyconf: the key in question 5676 */ 5677 void ieee80211_key_mic_failure(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf); 5678 5679 /** 5680 * ieee80211_key_replay - increment replay counter for the key 5681 * 5682 * Note: this is really only safe if no other RX function is called 5683 * at the same time. 5684 * 5685 * @keyconf: the key in question 5686 */ 5687 void ieee80211_key_replay(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf); 5688 5689 /** 5690 * ieee80211_wake_queue - wake specific queue 5691 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5692 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero). 5693 * 5694 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_wake_queue. 5695 */ 5696 void ieee80211_wake_queue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue); 5697 5698 /** 5699 * ieee80211_stop_queue - stop specific queue 5700 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5701 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero). 5702 * 5703 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue. 5704 */ 5705 void ieee80211_stop_queue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue); 5706 5707 /** 5708 * ieee80211_queue_stopped - test status of the queue 5709 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5710 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero). 5711 * 5712 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue. 5713 * 5714 * Return: %true if the queue is stopped. %false otherwise. 5715 */ 5716 5717 int ieee80211_queue_stopped(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue); 5718 5719 /** 5720 * ieee80211_stop_queues - stop all queues 5721 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5722 * 5723 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue. 5724 */ 5725 void ieee80211_stop_queues(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 5726 5727 /** 5728 * ieee80211_wake_queues - wake all queues 5729 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5730 * 5731 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_wake_queue. 5732 */ 5733 void ieee80211_wake_queues(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 5734 5735 /** 5736 * ieee80211_scan_completed - completed hardware scan 5737 * 5738 * When hardware scan offload is used (i.e. the hw_scan() callback is 5739 * assigned) this function needs to be called by the driver to notify 5740 * mac80211 that the scan finished. This function can be called from 5741 * any context, including hardirq context. 5742 * 5743 * @hw: the hardware that finished the scan 5744 * @info: information about the completed scan 5745 */ 5746 void ieee80211_scan_completed(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5747 struct cfg80211_scan_info *info); 5748 5749 /** 5750 * ieee80211_sched_scan_results - got results from scheduled scan 5751 * 5752 * When a scheduled scan is running, this function needs to be called by the 5753 * driver whenever there are new scan results available. 5754 * 5755 * @hw: the hardware that is performing scheduled scans 5756 */ 5757 void ieee80211_sched_scan_results(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 5758 5759 /** 5760 * ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped - inform that the scheduled scan has stopped 5761 * 5762 * When a scheduled scan is running, this function can be called by 5763 * the driver if it needs to stop the scan to perform another task. 5764 * Usual scenarios are drivers that cannot continue the scheduled scan 5765 * while associating, for instance. 5766 * 5767 * @hw: the hardware that is performing scheduled scans 5768 */ 5769 void ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 5770 5771 /** 5772 * enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags - interface iteration flags 5773 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_NORMAL: Iterate over all interfaces that have 5774 * been added to the driver; However, note that during hardware 5775 * reconfiguration (after restart_hw) it will iterate over a new 5776 * interface and over all the existing interfaces even if they 5777 * haven't been re-added to the driver yet. 5778 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_RESUME_ALL: During resume, iterate over all 5779 * interfaces, even if they haven't been re-added to the driver yet. 5780 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE: Iterate only active interfaces (netdev is up). 5781 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_SKIP_SDATA_NOT_IN_DRIVER: Skip any interfaces where SDATA 5782 * is not in the driver. This may fix crashes during firmware recovery 5783 * for instance. 5784 */ 5785 enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags { 5786 IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_NORMAL = 0, 5787 IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_RESUME_ALL = BIT(0), 5788 IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE = BIT(1), 5789 IEEE80211_IFACE_SKIP_SDATA_NOT_IN_DRIVER = BIT(2), 5790 }; 5791 5792 /** 5793 * ieee80211_iterate_interfaces - iterate interfaces 5794 * 5795 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given 5796 * hardware and calls the callback for them. This includes active as well as 5797 * inactive interfaces. This function allows the iterator function to sleep. 5798 * Will iterate over a new interface during add_interface(). 5799 * 5800 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over 5801 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags 5802 * @iterator: the iterator function to call 5803 * @data: first argument of the iterator function 5804 */ 5805 void ieee80211_iterate_interfaces(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 iter_flags, 5806 void (*iterator)(void *data, u8 *mac, 5807 struct ieee80211_vif *vif), 5808 void *data); 5809 5810 /** 5811 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces - iterate active interfaces 5812 * 5813 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given 5814 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them. 5815 * This function allows the iterator function to sleep, when the iterator 5816 * function is atomic @ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic can 5817 * be used. 5818 * Does not iterate over a new interface during add_interface(). 5819 * 5820 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over 5821 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags 5822 * @iterator: the iterator function to call 5823 * @data: first argument of the iterator function 5824 */ 5825 static inline void 5826 ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 iter_flags, 5827 void (*iterator)(void *data, u8 *mac, 5828 struct ieee80211_vif *vif), 5829 void *data) 5830 { 5831 ieee80211_iterate_interfaces(hw, 5832 iter_flags | IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE, 5833 iterator, data); 5834 } 5835 5836 /** 5837 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic - iterate active interfaces 5838 * 5839 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given 5840 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them. 5841 * This function requires the iterator callback function to be atomic, 5842 * if that is not desired, use @ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces instead. 5843 * Does not iterate over a new interface during add_interface(). 5844 * 5845 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over 5846 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags 5847 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep 5848 * @data: first argument of the iterator function 5849 */ 5850 void ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5851 u32 iter_flags, 5852 void (*iterator)(void *data, 5853 u8 *mac, 5854 struct ieee80211_vif *vif), 5855 void *data); 5856 5857 /** 5858 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_mtx - iterate active interfaces 5859 * 5860 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given 5861 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them. 5862 * This version can only be used while holding the wiphy mutex. 5863 * The driver must not call this with a lock held that it can also take in 5864 * response to callbacks from mac80211, and it must not call this within 5865 * callbacks made by mac80211 - both would result in deadlocks. 5866 * 5867 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over 5868 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags 5869 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep 5870 * @data: first argument of the iterator function 5871 */ 5872 void ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_mtx(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5873 u32 iter_flags, 5874 void (*iterator)(void *data, 5875 u8 *mac, 5876 struct ieee80211_vif *vif), 5877 void *data); 5878 5879 /** 5880 * ieee80211_iterate_stations - iterate stations 5881 * 5882 * This function iterates over all stations associated with a given 5883 * hardware that are currently uploaded to the driver and calls the callback 5884 * function for them. 5885 * This function allows the iterator function to sleep, when the iterator 5886 * function is atomic @ieee80211_iterate_stations_atomic can be used. 5887 * 5888 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over 5889 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep 5890 * @data: first argument of the iterator function 5891 */ 5892 void ieee80211_iterate_stations(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5893 void (*iterator)(void *data, 5894 struct ieee80211_sta *sta), 5895 void *data); 5896 5897 /** 5898 * ieee80211_iterate_stations_atomic - iterate stations 5899 * 5900 * This function iterates over all stations associated with a given 5901 * hardware that are currently uploaded to the driver and calls the callback 5902 * function for them. 5903 * This function requires the iterator callback function to be atomic, 5904 * 5905 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over 5906 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep 5907 * @data: first argument of the iterator function 5908 */ 5909 void ieee80211_iterate_stations_atomic(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5910 void (*iterator)(void *data, 5911 struct ieee80211_sta *sta), 5912 void *data); 5913 /** 5914 * ieee80211_queue_work - add work onto the mac80211 workqueue 5915 * 5916 * Drivers and mac80211 use this to add work onto the mac80211 workqueue. 5917 * This helper ensures drivers are not queueing work when they should not be. 5918 * 5919 * @hw: the hardware struct for the interface we are adding work for 5920 * @work: the work we want to add onto the mac80211 workqueue 5921 */ 5922 void ieee80211_queue_work(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct work_struct *work); 5923 5924 /** 5925 * ieee80211_queue_delayed_work - add work onto the mac80211 workqueue 5926 * 5927 * Drivers and mac80211 use this to queue delayed work onto the mac80211 5928 * workqueue. 5929 * 5930 * @hw: the hardware struct for the interface we are adding work for 5931 * @dwork: delayable work to queue onto the mac80211 workqueue 5932 * @delay: number of jiffies to wait before queueing 5933 */ 5934 void ieee80211_queue_delayed_work(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5935 struct delayed_work *dwork, 5936 unsigned long delay); 5937 5938 /** 5939 * ieee80211_start_tx_ba_session - Start a tx Block Ack session. 5940 * @sta: the station for which to start a BA session 5941 * @tid: the TID to BA on. 5942 * @timeout: session timeout value (in TUs) 5943 * 5944 * Return: success if addBA request was sent, failure otherwise 5945 * 5946 * Although mac80211/low level driver/user space application can estimate 5947 * the need to start aggregation on a certain RA/TID, the session level 5948 * will be managed by the mac80211. 5949 */ 5950 int ieee80211_start_tx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u16 tid, 5951 u16 timeout); 5952 5953 /** 5954 * ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe - low level driver ready to aggregate. 5955 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback 5956 * @ra: receiver address of the BA session recipient. 5957 * @tid: the TID to BA on. 5958 * 5959 * This function must be called by low level driver once it has 5960 * finished with preparations for the BA session. It can be called 5961 * from any context. 5962 */ 5963 void ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *ra, 5964 u16 tid); 5965 5966 /** 5967 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_session - Stop a Block Ack session. 5968 * @sta: the station whose BA session to stop 5969 * @tid: the TID to stop BA. 5970 * 5971 * Return: negative error if the TID is invalid, or no aggregation active 5972 * 5973 * Although mac80211/low level driver/user space application can estimate 5974 * the need to stop aggregation on a certain RA/TID, the session level 5975 * will be managed by the mac80211. 5976 */ 5977 int ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u16 tid); 5978 5979 /** 5980 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe - low level driver ready to stop aggregate. 5981 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback 5982 * @ra: receiver address of the BA session recipient. 5983 * @tid: the desired TID to BA on. 5984 * 5985 * This function must be called by low level driver once it has 5986 * finished with preparations for the BA session tear down. It 5987 * can be called from any context. 5988 */ 5989 void ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *ra, 5990 u16 tid); 5991 5992 /** 5993 * ieee80211_find_sta - find a station 5994 * 5995 * @vif: virtual interface to look for station on 5996 * @addr: station's address 5997 * 5998 * Return: The station, if found. %NULL otherwise. 5999 * 6000 * Note: This function must be called under RCU lock and the 6001 * resulting pointer is only valid under RCU lock as well. 6002 */ 6003 struct ieee80211_sta *ieee80211_find_sta(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 6004 const u8 *addr); 6005 6006 /** 6007 * ieee80211_find_sta_by_ifaddr - find a station on hardware 6008 * 6009 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 6010 * @addr: remote station's address 6011 * @localaddr: local address (vif->sdata->vif.addr). Use NULL for 'any'. 6012 * 6013 * Return: The station, if found. %NULL otherwise. 6014 * 6015 * Note: This function must be called under RCU lock and the 6016 * resulting pointer is only valid under RCU lock as well. 6017 * 6018 * NOTE: You may pass NULL for localaddr, but then you will just get 6019 * the first STA that matches the remote address 'addr'. 6020 * We can have multiple STA associated with multiple 6021 * logical stations (e.g. consider a station connecting to another 6022 * BSSID on the same AP hardware without disconnecting first). 6023 * In this case, the result of this method with localaddr NULL 6024 * is not reliable. 6025 * 6026 * DO NOT USE THIS FUNCTION with localaddr NULL if at all possible. 6027 */ 6028 struct ieee80211_sta *ieee80211_find_sta_by_ifaddr(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6029 const u8 *addr, 6030 const u8 *localaddr); 6031 6032 /** 6033 * ieee80211_find_sta_by_link_addrs - find STA by link addresses 6034 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 6035 * @addr: remote station's link address 6036 * @localaddr: local link address, use %NULL for any (but avoid that) 6037 * @link_id: pointer to obtain the link ID if the STA is found, 6038 * may be %NULL if the link ID is not needed 6039 * 6040 * Obtain the STA by link address, must use RCU protection. 6041 */ 6042 struct ieee80211_sta * 6043 ieee80211_find_sta_by_link_addrs(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6044 const u8 *addr, 6045 const u8 *localaddr, 6046 unsigned int *link_id); 6047 6048 /** 6049 * ieee80211_sta_block_awake - block station from waking up 6050 * @hw: the hardware 6051 * @pubsta: the station 6052 * @block: whether to block or unblock 6053 * 6054 * Some devices require that all frames that are on the queues 6055 * for a specific station that went to sleep are flushed before 6056 * a poll response or frames after the station woke up can be 6057 * delivered to that it. Note that such frames must be rejected 6058 * by the driver as filtered, with the appropriate status flag. 6059 * 6060 * This function allows implementing this mode in a race-free 6061 * manner. 6062 * 6063 * To do this, a driver must keep track of the number of frames 6064 * still enqueued for a specific station. If this number is not 6065 * zero when the station goes to sleep, the driver must call 6066 * this function to force mac80211 to consider the station to 6067 * be asleep regardless of the station's actual state. Once the 6068 * number of outstanding frames reaches zero, the driver must 6069 * call this function again to unblock the station. That will 6070 * cause mac80211 to be able to send ps-poll responses, and if 6071 * the station queried in the meantime then frames will also 6072 * be sent out as a result of this. Additionally, the driver 6073 * will be notified that the station woke up some time after 6074 * it is unblocked, regardless of whether the station actually 6075 * woke up while blocked or not. 6076 */ 6077 void ieee80211_sta_block_awake(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6078 struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, bool block); 6079 6080 /** 6081 * ieee80211_sta_eosp - notify mac80211 about end of SP 6082 * @pubsta: the station 6083 * 6084 * When a device transmits frames in a way that it can't tell 6085 * mac80211 in the TX status about the EOSP, it must clear the 6086 * %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP bit and call this function instead. 6087 * This applies for PS-Poll as well as uAPSD. 6088 * 6089 * Note that just like with _tx_status() and _rx() drivers must 6090 * not mix calls to irqsafe/non-irqsafe versions, this function 6091 * must not be mixed with those either. Use the all irqsafe, or 6092 * all non-irqsafe, don't mix! 6093 * 6094 * NB: the _irqsafe version of this function doesn't exist, no 6095 * driver needs it right now. Don't call this function if 6096 * you'd need the _irqsafe version, look at the git history 6097 * and restore the _irqsafe version! 6098 */ 6099 void ieee80211_sta_eosp(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta); 6100 6101 /** 6102 * ieee80211_send_eosp_nullfunc - ask mac80211 to send NDP with EOSP 6103 * @pubsta: the station 6104 * @tid: the tid of the NDP 6105 * 6106 * Sometimes the device understands that it needs to close 6107 * the Service Period unexpectedly. This can happen when 6108 * sending frames that are filling holes in the BA window. 6109 * In this case, the device can ask mac80211 to send a 6110 * Nullfunc frame with EOSP set. When that happens, the 6111 * driver must have called ieee80211_sta_set_buffered() to 6112 * let mac80211 know that there are no buffered frames any 6113 * more, otherwise mac80211 will get the more_data bit wrong. 6114 * The low level driver must have made sure that the frame 6115 * will be sent despite the station being in power-save. 6116 * Mac80211 won't call allow_buffered_frames(). 6117 * Note that calling this function, doesn't exempt the driver 6118 * from closing the EOSP properly, it will still have to call 6119 * ieee80211_sta_eosp when the NDP is sent. 6120 */ 6121 void ieee80211_send_eosp_nullfunc(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, int tid); 6122 6123 /** 6124 * ieee80211_sta_recalc_aggregates - recalculate aggregate data after a change 6125 * @pubsta: the station 6126 * 6127 * Call this function after changing a per-link aggregate data as referenced in 6128 * &struct ieee80211_sta_aggregates by accessing the agg field of 6129 * &struct ieee80211_link_sta. 6130 * 6131 * With non MLO the data in deflink will be referenced directly. In that case 6132 * there is no need to call this function. 6133 */ 6134 void ieee80211_sta_recalc_aggregates(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta); 6135 6136 /** 6137 * ieee80211_sta_register_airtime - register airtime usage for a sta/tid 6138 * 6139 * Register airtime usage for a given sta on a given tid. The driver must call 6140 * this function to notify mac80211 that a station used a certain amount of 6141 * airtime. This information will be used by the TXQ scheduler to schedule 6142 * stations in a way that ensures airtime fairness. 6143 * 6144 * The reported airtime should as a minimum include all time that is spent 6145 * transmitting to the remote station, including overhead and padding, but not 6146 * including time spent waiting for a TXOP. If the time is not reported by the 6147 * hardware it can in some cases be calculated from the rate and known frame 6148 * composition. When possible, the time should include any failed transmission 6149 * attempts. 6150 * 6151 * The driver can either call this function synchronously for every packet or 6152 * aggregate, or asynchronously as airtime usage information becomes available. 6153 * TX and RX airtime can be reported together, or separately by setting one of 6154 * them to 0. 6155 * 6156 * @pubsta: the station 6157 * @tid: the TID to register airtime for 6158 * @tx_airtime: airtime used during TX (in usec) 6159 * @rx_airtime: airtime used during RX (in usec) 6160 */ 6161 void ieee80211_sta_register_airtime(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, u8 tid, 6162 u32 tx_airtime, u32 rx_airtime); 6163 6164 /** 6165 * ieee80211_txq_airtime_check - check if a txq can send frame to device 6166 * 6167 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 6168 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface 6169 * 6170 * Return true if the AQL's airtime limit has not been reached and the txq can 6171 * continue to send more packets to the device. Otherwise return false. 6172 */ 6173 bool 6174 ieee80211_txq_airtime_check(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_txq *txq); 6175 6176 /** 6177 * ieee80211_iter_keys - iterate keys programmed into the device 6178 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 6179 * @vif: virtual interface to iterate, may be %NULL for all 6180 * @iter: iterator function that will be called for each key 6181 * @iter_data: custom data to pass to the iterator function 6182 * 6183 * This function can be used to iterate all the keys known to 6184 * mac80211, even those that weren't previously programmed into 6185 * the device. This is intended for use in WoWLAN if the device 6186 * needs reprogramming of the keys during suspend. Note that due 6187 * to locking reasons, it is also only safe to call this at few 6188 * spots since it must hold the RTNL and be able to sleep. 6189 * 6190 * The order in which the keys are iterated matches the order 6191 * in which they were originally installed and handed to the 6192 * set_key callback. 6193 */ 6194 void ieee80211_iter_keys(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6195 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 6196 void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6197 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 6198 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 6199 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key, 6200 void *data), 6201 void *iter_data); 6202 6203 /** 6204 * ieee80211_iter_keys_rcu - iterate keys programmed into the device 6205 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 6206 * @vif: virtual interface to iterate, may be %NULL for all 6207 * @iter: iterator function that will be called for each key 6208 * @iter_data: custom data to pass to the iterator function 6209 * 6210 * This function can be used to iterate all the keys known to 6211 * mac80211, even those that weren't previously programmed into 6212 * the device. Note that due to locking reasons, keys of station 6213 * in removal process will be skipped. 6214 * 6215 * This function requires being called in an RCU critical section, 6216 * and thus iter must be atomic. 6217 */ 6218 void ieee80211_iter_keys_rcu(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6219 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 6220 void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6221 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 6222 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 6223 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key, 6224 void *data), 6225 void *iter_data); 6226 6227 /** 6228 * ieee80211_iter_chan_contexts_atomic - iterate channel contexts 6229 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 6230 * @iter: iterator function 6231 * @iter_data: data passed to iterator function 6232 * 6233 * Iterate all active channel contexts. This function is atomic and 6234 * doesn't acquire any locks internally that might be held in other 6235 * places while calling into the driver. 6236 * 6237 * The iterator will not find a context that's being added (during 6238 * the driver callback to add it) but will find it while it's being 6239 * removed. 6240 * 6241 * Note that during hardware restart, all contexts that existed 6242 * before the restart are considered already present so will be 6243 * found while iterating, whether they've been re-added already 6244 * or not. 6245 */ 6246 void ieee80211_iter_chan_contexts_atomic( 6247 struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6248 void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6249 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *chanctx_conf, 6250 void *data), 6251 void *iter_data); 6252 6253 /** 6254 * ieee80211_ap_probereq_get - retrieve a Probe Request template 6255 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 6256 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 6257 * 6258 * Creates a Probe Request template which can, for example, be uploaded to 6259 * hardware. The template is filled with bssid, ssid and supported rate 6260 * information. This function must only be called from within the 6261 * .bss_info_changed callback function and only in managed mode. The function 6262 * is only useful when the interface is associated, otherwise it will return 6263 * %NULL. 6264 * 6265 * Return: The Probe Request template. %NULL on error. 6266 */ 6267 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_ap_probereq_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6268 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 6269 6270 /** 6271 * ieee80211_beacon_loss - inform hardware does not receive beacons 6272 * 6273 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 6274 * 6275 * When beacon filtering is enabled with %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER and 6276 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set, the driver needs to inform whenever the 6277 * hardware is not receiving beacons with this function. 6278 */ 6279 void ieee80211_beacon_loss(struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 6280 6281 /** 6282 * ieee80211_connection_loss - inform hardware has lost connection to the AP 6283 * 6284 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 6285 * 6286 * When beacon filtering is enabled with %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER, and 6287 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS and %IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR are set, the driver 6288 * needs to inform if the connection to the AP has been lost. 6289 * The function may also be called if the connection needs to be terminated 6290 * for some other reason, even if %IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR isn't set. 6291 * 6292 * This function will cause immediate change to disassociated state, 6293 * without connection recovery attempts. 6294 */ 6295 void ieee80211_connection_loss(struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 6296 6297 /** 6298 * ieee80211_disconnect - request disconnection 6299 * 6300 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 6301 * @reconnect: immediate reconnect is desired 6302 * 6303 * Request disconnection from the current network and, if enabled, send a 6304 * hint to the higher layers that immediate reconnect is desired. 6305 */ 6306 void ieee80211_disconnect(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, bool reconnect); 6307 6308 /** 6309 * ieee80211_resume_disconnect - disconnect from AP after resume 6310 * 6311 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 6312 * 6313 * Instructs mac80211 to disconnect from the AP after resume. 6314 * Drivers can use this after WoWLAN if they know that the 6315 * connection cannot be kept up, for example because keys were 6316 * used while the device was asleep but the replay counters or 6317 * similar cannot be retrieved from the device during resume. 6318 * 6319 * Note that due to implementation issues, if the driver uses 6320 * the reconfiguration functionality during resume the interface 6321 * will still be added as associated first during resume and then 6322 * disconnect normally later. 6323 * 6324 * This function can only be called from the resume callback and 6325 * the driver must not be holding any of its own locks while it 6326 * calls this function, or at least not any locks it needs in the 6327 * key configuration paths (if it supports HW crypto). 6328 */ 6329 void ieee80211_resume_disconnect(struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 6330 6331 /** 6332 * ieee80211_hw_restart_disconnect - disconnect from AP after 6333 * hardware restart 6334 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 6335 * 6336 * Instructs mac80211 to disconnect from the AP after 6337 * hardware restart. 6338 */ 6339 void ieee80211_hw_restart_disconnect(struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 6340 6341 /** 6342 * ieee80211_cqm_rssi_notify - inform a configured connection quality monitoring 6343 * rssi threshold triggered 6344 * 6345 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 6346 * @rssi_event: the RSSI trigger event type 6347 * @rssi_level: new RSSI level value or 0 if not available 6348 * @gfp: context flags 6349 * 6350 * When the %IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI is set, and a connection quality 6351 * monitoring is configured with an rssi threshold, the driver will inform 6352 * whenever the rssi level reaches the threshold. 6353 */ 6354 void ieee80211_cqm_rssi_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 6355 enum nl80211_cqm_rssi_threshold_event rssi_event, 6356 s32 rssi_level, 6357 gfp_t gfp); 6358 6359 /** 6360 * ieee80211_cqm_beacon_loss_notify - inform CQM of beacon loss 6361 * 6362 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 6363 * @gfp: context flags 6364 */ 6365 void ieee80211_cqm_beacon_loss_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, gfp_t gfp); 6366 6367 /** 6368 * ieee80211_radar_detected - inform that a radar was detected 6369 * 6370 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 6371 */ 6372 void ieee80211_radar_detected(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 6373 6374 /** 6375 * ieee80211_chswitch_done - Complete channel switch process 6376 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 6377 * @success: make the channel switch successful or not 6378 * 6379 * Complete the channel switch post-process: set the new operational channel 6380 * and wake up the suspended queues. 6381 */ 6382 void ieee80211_chswitch_done(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, bool success); 6383 6384 /** 6385 * ieee80211_channel_switch_disconnect - disconnect due to channel switch error 6386 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 6387 * @block_tx: if %true, do not send deauth frame. 6388 * 6389 * Instruct mac80211 to disconnect due to a channel switch error. The channel 6390 * switch can request to block the tx and so, we need to make sure we do not send 6391 * a deauth frame in this case. 6392 */ 6393 void ieee80211_channel_switch_disconnect(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 6394 bool block_tx); 6395 6396 /** 6397 * ieee80211_request_smps - request SM PS transition 6398 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 6399 * @link_id: link ID for MLO, or 0 6400 * @smps_mode: new SM PS mode 6401 * 6402 * This allows the driver to request an SM PS transition in managed 6403 * mode. This is useful when the driver has more information than 6404 * the stack about possible interference, for example by bluetooth. 6405 */ 6406 void ieee80211_request_smps(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, unsigned int link_id, 6407 enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode); 6408 6409 /** 6410 * ieee80211_ready_on_channel - notification of remain-on-channel start 6411 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 6412 */ 6413 void ieee80211_ready_on_channel(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 6414 6415 /** 6416 * ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired - remain_on_channel duration expired 6417 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 6418 */ 6419 void ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 6420 6421 /** 6422 * ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session - callback to stop existing BA sessions 6423 * 6424 * in order not to harm the system performance and user experience, the device 6425 * may request not to allow any rx ba session and tear down existing rx ba 6426 * sessions based on system constraints such as periodic BT activity that needs 6427 * to limit wlan activity (eg.sco or a2dp)." 6428 * in such cases, the intention is to limit the duration of the rx ppdu and 6429 * therefore prevent the peer device to use a-mpdu aggregation. 6430 * 6431 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 6432 * @ba_rx_bitmap: Bit map of open rx ba per tid 6433 * @addr: & to bssid mac address 6434 */ 6435 void ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u16 ba_rx_bitmap, 6436 const u8 *addr); 6437 6438 /** 6439 * ieee80211_mark_rx_ba_filtered_frames - move RX BA window and mark filtered 6440 * @pubsta: station struct 6441 * @tid: the session's TID 6442 * @ssn: starting sequence number of the bitmap, all frames before this are 6443 * assumed to be out of the window after the call 6444 * @filtered: bitmap of filtered frames, BIT(0) is the @ssn entry etc. 6445 * @received_mpdus: number of received mpdus in firmware 6446 * 6447 * This function moves the BA window and releases all frames before @ssn, and 6448 * marks frames marked in the bitmap as having been filtered. Afterwards, it 6449 * checks if any frames in the window starting from @ssn can now be released 6450 * (in case they were only waiting for frames that were filtered.) 6451 */ 6452 void ieee80211_mark_rx_ba_filtered_frames(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, u8 tid, 6453 u16 ssn, u64 filtered, 6454 u16 received_mpdus); 6455 6456 /** 6457 * ieee80211_send_bar - send a BlockAckReq frame 6458 * 6459 * can be used to flush pending frames from the peer's aggregation reorder 6460 * buffer. 6461 * 6462 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 6463 * @ra: the peer's destination address 6464 * @tid: the TID of the aggregation session 6465 * @ssn: the new starting sequence number for the receiver 6466 */ 6467 void ieee80211_send_bar(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u8 *ra, u16 tid, u16 ssn); 6468 6469 /** 6470 * ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl - helper to queue an RX BA work 6471 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback 6472 * @addr: station mac address 6473 * @tid: the rx tid 6474 */ 6475 void ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *addr, 6476 unsigned int tid); 6477 6478 /** 6479 * ieee80211_start_rx_ba_session_offl - start a Rx BA session 6480 * 6481 * Some device drivers may offload part of the Rx aggregation flow including 6482 * AddBa/DelBa negotiation but may otherwise be incapable of full Rx 6483 * reordering. 6484 * 6485 * Create structures responsible for reordering so device drivers may call here 6486 * when they complete AddBa negotiation. 6487 * 6488 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback 6489 * @addr: station mac address 6490 * @tid: the rx tid 6491 */ 6492 static inline void ieee80211_start_rx_ba_session_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 6493 const u8 *addr, u16 tid) 6494 { 6495 if (WARN_ON(tid >= IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS)) 6496 return; 6497 ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl(vif, addr, tid); 6498 } 6499 6500 /** 6501 * ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session_offl - stop a Rx BA session 6502 * 6503 * Some device drivers may offload part of the Rx aggregation flow including 6504 * AddBa/DelBa negotiation but may otherwise be incapable of full Rx 6505 * reordering. 6506 * 6507 * Destroy structures responsible for reordering so device drivers may call here 6508 * when they complete DelBa negotiation. 6509 * 6510 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback 6511 * @addr: station mac address 6512 * @tid: the rx tid 6513 */ 6514 static inline void ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 6515 const u8 *addr, u16 tid) 6516 { 6517 if (WARN_ON(tid >= IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS)) 6518 return; 6519 ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl(vif, addr, tid + IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS); 6520 } 6521 6522 /** 6523 * ieee80211_rx_ba_timer_expired - stop a Rx BA session due to timeout 6524 * 6525 * Some device drivers do not offload AddBa/DelBa negotiation, but handle rx 6526 * buffer reording internally, and therefore also handle the session timer. 6527 * 6528 * Trigger the timeout flow, which sends a DelBa. 6529 * 6530 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback 6531 * @addr: station mac address 6532 * @tid: the rx tid 6533 */ 6534 void ieee80211_rx_ba_timer_expired(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 6535 const u8 *addr, unsigned int tid); 6536 6537 /* Rate control API */ 6538 6539 /** 6540 * struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control - rate control information for/from RC algo 6541 * 6542 * @hw: The hardware the algorithm is invoked for. 6543 * @sband: The band this frame is being transmitted on. 6544 * @bss_conf: the current BSS configuration 6545 * @skb: the skb that will be transmitted, the control information in it needs 6546 * to be filled in 6547 * @reported_rate: The rate control algorithm can fill this in to indicate 6548 * which rate should be reported to userspace as the current rate and 6549 * used for rate calculations in the mesh network. 6550 * @rts: whether RTS will be used for this frame because it is longer than the 6551 * RTS threshold 6552 * @short_preamble: whether mac80211 will request short-preamble transmission 6553 * if the selected rate supports it 6554 * @rate_idx_mask: user-requested (legacy) rate mask 6555 * @rate_idx_mcs_mask: user-requested MCS rate mask (NULL if not in use) 6556 * @bss: whether this frame is sent out in AP or IBSS mode 6557 */ 6558 struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control { 6559 struct ieee80211_hw *hw; 6560 struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband; 6561 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *bss_conf; 6562 struct sk_buff *skb; 6563 struct ieee80211_tx_rate reported_rate; 6564 bool rts, short_preamble; 6565 u32 rate_idx_mask; 6566 u8 *rate_idx_mcs_mask; 6567 bool bss; 6568 }; 6569 6570 /** 6571 * enum rate_control_capabilities - rate control capabilities 6572 */ 6573 enum rate_control_capabilities { 6574 /** 6575 * @RATE_CTRL_CAPA_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW: 6576 * Support for extended NSS BW support (dot11VHTExtendedNSSCapable) 6577 * Note that this is only looked at if the minimum number of chains 6578 * that the AP uses is < the number of TX chains the hardware has, 6579 * otherwise the NSS difference doesn't bother us. 6580 */ 6581 RATE_CTRL_CAPA_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW = BIT(0), 6582 /** 6583 * @RATE_CTRL_CAPA_AMPDU_TRIGGER: 6584 * mac80211 should start A-MPDU sessions on tx 6585 */ 6586 RATE_CTRL_CAPA_AMPDU_TRIGGER = BIT(1), 6587 }; 6588 6589 struct rate_control_ops { 6590 unsigned long capa; 6591 const char *name; 6592 void *(*alloc)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 6593 void (*add_debugfs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, void *priv, 6594 struct dentry *debugfsdir); 6595 void (*free)(void *priv); 6596 6597 void *(*alloc_sta)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, gfp_t gfp); 6598 void (*rate_init)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband, 6599 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef, 6600 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta); 6601 void (*rate_update)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband, 6602 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef, 6603 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta, 6604 u32 changed); 6605 void (*free_sta)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 6606 void *priv_sta); 6607 6608 void (*tx_status_ext)(void *priv, 6609 struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband, 6610 void *priv_sta, struct ieee80211_tx_status *st); 6611 void (*tx_status)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband, 6612 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta, 6613 struct sk_buff *skb); 6614 void (*get_rate)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta, 6615 struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control *txrc); 6616 6617 void (*add_sta_debugfs)(void *priv, void *priv_sta, 6618 struct dentry *dir); 6619 6620 u32 (*get_expected_throughput)(void *priv_sta); 6621 }; 6622 6623 static inline int rate_supported(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 6624 enum nl80211_band band, 6625 int index) 6626 { 6627 return (sta == NULL || sta->deflink.supp_rates[band] & BIT(index)); 6628 } 6629 6630 static inline s8 6631 rate_lowest_index(struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband, 6632 struct ieee80211_sta *sta) 6633 { 6634 int i; 6635 6636 for (i = 0; i < sband->n_bitrates; i++) 6637 if (rate_supported(sta, sband->band, i)) 6638 return i; 6639 6640 /* warn when we cannot find a rate. */ 6641 WARN_ON_ONCE(1); 6642 6643 /* and return 0 (the lowest index) */ 6644 return 0; 6645 } 6646 6647 static inline 6648 bool rate_usable_index_exists(struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband, 6649 struct ieee80211_sta *sta) 6650 { 6651 unsigned int i; 6652 6653 for (i = 0; i < sband->n_bitrates; i++) 6654 if (rate_supported(sta, sband->band, i)) 6655 return true; 6656 return false; 6657 } 6658 6659 /** 6660 * rate_control_set_rates - pass the sta rate selection to mac80211/driver 6661 * 6662 * When not doing a rate control probe to test rates, rate control should pass 6663 * its rate selection to mac80211. If the driver supports receiving a station 6664 * rate table, it will use it to ensure that frames are always sent based on 6665 * the most recent rate control module decision. 6666 * 6667 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 6668 * @pubsta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer to the target destination. 6669 * @rates: new tx rate set to be used for this station. 6670 */ 6671 int rate_control_set_rates(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6672 struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, 6673 struct ieee80211_sta_rates *rates); 6674 6675 int ieee80211_rate_control_register(const struct rate_control_ops *ops); 6676 void ieee80211_rate_control_unregister(const struct rate_control_ops *ops); 6677 6678 static inline bool 6679 conf_is_ht20(struct ieee80211_conf *conf) 6680 { 6681 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_20; 6682 } 6683 6684 static inline bool 6685 conf_is_ht40_minus(struct ieee80211_conf *conf) 6686 { 6687 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40 && 6688 conf->chandef.center_freq1 < conf->chandef.chan->center_freq; 6689 } 6690 6691 static inline bool 6692 conf_is_ht40_plus(struct ieee80211_conf *conf) 6693 { 6694 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40 && 6695 conf->chandef.center_freq1 > conf->chandef.chan->center_freq; 6696 } 6697 6698 static inline bool 6699 conf_is_ht40(struct ieee80211_conf *conf) 6700 { 6701 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40; 6702 } 6703 6704 static inline bool 6705 conf_is_ht(struct ieee80211_conf *conf) 6706 { 6707 return (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_5) && 6708 (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_10) && 6709 (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_20_NOHT); 6710 } 6711 6712 static inline enum nl80211_iftype 6713 ieee80211_iftype_p2p(enum nl80211_iftype type, bool p2p) 6714 { 6715 if (p2p) { 6716 switch (type) { 6717 case NL80211_IFTYPE_STATION: 6718 return NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_CLIENT; 6719 case NL80211_IFTYPE_AP: 6720 return NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_GO; 6721 default: 6722 break; 6723 } 6724 } 6725 return type; 6726 } 6727 6728 static inline enum nl80211_iftype 6729 ieee80211_vif_type_p2p(struct ieee80211_vif *vif) 6730 { 6731 return ieee80211_iftype_p2p(vif->type, vif->p2p); 6732 } 6733 6734 /** 6735 * ieee80211_update_mu_groups - set the VHT MU-MIMO groud data 6736 * 6737 * @vif: the specified virtual interface 6738 * @link_id: the link ID for MLO, otherwise 0 6739 * @membership: 64 bits array - a bit is set if station is member of the group 6740 * @position: 2 bits per group id indicating the position in the group 6741 * 6742 * Note: This function assumes that the given vif is valid and the position and 6743 * membership data is of the correct size and are in the same byte order as the 6744 * matching GroupId management frame. 6745 * Calls to this function need to be serialized with RX path. 6746 */ 6747 void ieee80211_update_mu_groups(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, unsigned int link_id, 6748 const u8 *membership, const u8 *position); 6749 6750 void ieee80211_enable_rssi_reports(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 6751 int rssi_min_thold, 6752 int rssi_max_thold); 6753 6754 void ieee80211_disable_rssi_reports(struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 6755 6756 /** 6757 * ieee80211_ave_rssi - report the average RSSI for the specified interface 6758 * 6759 * @vif: the specified virtual interface 6760 * 6761 * Note: This function assumes that the given vif is valid. 6762 * 6763 * Return: The average RSSI value for the requested interface, or 0 if not 6764 * applicable. 6765 */ 6766 int ieee80211_ave_rssi(struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 6767 6768 /** 6769 * ieee80211_report_wowlan_wakeup - report WoWLAN wakeup 6770 * @vif: virtual interface 6771 * @wakeup: wakeup reason(s) 6772 * @gfp: allocation flags 6773 * 6774 * See cfg80211_report_wowlan_wakeup(). 6775 */ 6776 void ieee80211_report_wowlan_wakeup(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 6777 struct cfg80211_wowlan_wakeup *wakeup, 6778 gfp_t gfp); 6779 6780 /** 6781 * ieee80211_tx_prepare_skb - prepare an 802.11 skb for transmission 6782 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 6783 * @vif: virtual interface 6784 * @skb: frame to be sent from within the driver 6785 * @band: the band to transmit on 6786 * @sta: optional pointer to get the station to send the frame to 6787 * 6788 * Note: must be called under RCU lock 6789 */ 6790 bool ieee80211_tx_prepare_skb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6791 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, struct sk_buff *skb, 6792 int band, struct ieee80211_sta **sta); 6793 6794 /** 6795 * ieee80211_parse_tx_radiotap - Sanity-check and parse the radiotap header 6796 * of injected frames. 6797 * 6798 * To accurately parse and take into account rate and retransmission fields, 6799 * you must initialize the chandef field in the ieee80211_tx_info structure 6800 * of the skb before calling this function. 6801 * 6802 * @skb: packet injected by userspace 6803 * @dev: the &struct device of this 802.11 device 6804 */ 6805 bool ieee80211_parse_tx_radiotap(struct sk_buff *skb, 6806 struct net_device *dev); 6807 6808 /** 6809 * struct ieee80211_noa_data - holds temporary data for tracking P2P NoA state 6810 * 6811 * @next_tsf: TSF timestamp of the next absent state change 6812 * @has_next_tsf: next absent state change event pending 6813 * 6814 * @absent: descriptor bitmask, set if GO is currently absent 6815 * 6816 * private: 6817 * 6818 * @count: count fields from the NoA descriptors 6819 * @desc: adjusted data from the NoA 6820 */ 6821 struct ieee80211_noa_data { 6822 u32 next_tsf; 6823 bool has_next_tsf; 6824 6825 u8 absent; 6826 6827 u8 count[IEEE80211_P2P_NOA_DESC_MAX]; 6828 struct { 6829 u32 start; 6830 u32 duration; 6831 u32 interval; 6832 } desc[IEEE80211_P2P_NOA_DESC_MAX]; 6833 }; 6834 6835 /** 6836 * ieee80211_parse_p2p_noa - initialize NoA tracking data from P2P IE 6837 * 6838 * @attr: P2P NoA IE 6839 * @data: NoA tracking data 6840 * @tsf: current TSF timestamp 6841 * 6842 * Return: number of successfully parsed descriptors 6843 */ 6844 int ieee80211_parse_p2p_noa(const struct ieee80211_p2p_noa_attr *attr, 6845 struct ieee80211_noa_data *data, u32 tsf); 6846 6847 /** 6848 * ieee80211_update_p2p_noa - get next pending P2P GO absent state change 6849 * 6850 * @data: NoA tracking data 6851 * @tsf: current TSF timestamp 6852 */ 6853 void ieee80211_update_p2p_noa(struct ieee80211_noa_data *data, u32 tsf); 6854 6855 /** 6856 * ieee80211_tdls_oper_request - request userspace to perform a TDLS operation 6857 * @vif: virtual interface 6858 * @peer: the peer's destination address 6859 * @oper: the requested TDLS operation 6860 * @reason_code: reason code for the operation, valid for TDLS teardown 6861 * @gfp: allocation flags 6862 * 6863 * See cfg80211_tdls_oper_request(). 6864 */ 6865 void ieee80211_tdls_oper_request(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *peer, 6866 enum nl80211_tdls_operation oper, 6867 u16 reason_code, gfp_t gfp); 6868 6869 /** 6870 * ieee80211_reserve_tid - request to reserve a specific TID 6871 * 6872 * There is sometimes a need (such as in TDLS) for blocking the driver from 6873 * using a specific TID so that the FW can use it for certain operations such 6874 * as sending PTI requests. To make sure that the driver doesn't use that TID, 6875 * this function must be called as it flushes out packets on this TID and marks 6876 * it as blocked, so that any transmit for the station on this TID will be 6877 * redirected to the alternative TID in the same AC. 6878 * 6879 * Note that this function blocks and may call back into the driver, so it 6880 * should be called without driver locks held. Also note this function should 6881 * only be called from the driver's @sta_state callback. 6882 * 6883 * @sta: the station to reserve the TID for 6884 * @tid: the TID to reserve 6885 * 6886 * Returns: 0 on success, else on failure 6887 */ 6888 int ieee80211_reserve_tid(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid); 6889 6890 /** 6891 * ieee80211_unreserve_tid - request to unreserve a specific TID 6892 * 6893 * Once there is no longer any need for reserving a certain TID, this function 6894 * should be called, and no longer will packets have their TID modified for 6895 * preventing use of this TID in the driver. 6896 * 6897 * Note that this function blocks and acquires a lock, so it should be called 6898 * without driver locks held. Also note this function should only be called 6899 * from the driver's @sta_state callback. 6900 * 6901 * @sta: the station 6902 * @tid: the TID to unreserve 6903 */ 6904 void ieee80211_unreserve_tid(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid); 6905 6906 /** 6907 * ieee80211_tx_dequeue - dequeue a packet from a software tx queue 6908 * 6909 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 6910 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface, or from 6911 * ieee80211_next_txq() 6912 * 6913 * Returns the skb if successful, %NULL if no frame was available. 6914 * 6915 * Note that this must be called in an rcu_read_lock() critical section, 6916 * which can only be released after the SKB was handled. Some pointers in 6917 * skb->cb, e.g. the key pointer, are protected by RCU and thus the 6918 * critical section must persist not just for the duration of this call 6919 * but for the duration of the frame handling. 6920 * However, also note that while in the wake_tx_queue() method, 6921 * rcu_read_lock() is already held. 6922 * 6923 * softirqs must also be disabled when this function is called. 6924 * In process context, use ieee80211_tx_dequeue_ni() instead. 6925 */ 6926 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_tx_dequeue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6927 struct ieee80211_txq *txq); 6928 6929 /** 6930 * ieee80211_tx_dequeue_ni - dequeue a packet from a software tx queue 6931 * (in process context) 6932 * 6933 * Like ieee80211_tx_dequeue() but can be called in process context 6934 * (internally disables bottom halves). 6935 * 6936 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 6937 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface, or from 6938 * ieee80211_next_txq() 6939 */ 6940 static inline struct sk_buff *ieee80211_tx_dequeue_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6941 struct ieee80211_txq *txq) 6942 { 6943 struct sk_buff *skb; 6944 6945 local_bh_disable(); 6946 skb = ieee80211_tx_dequeue(hw, txq); 6947 local_bh_enable(); 6948 6949 return skb; 6950 } 6951 6952 /** 6953 * ieee80211_next_txq - get next tx queue to pull packets from 6954 * 6955 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 6956 * @ac: AC number to return packets from. 6957 * 6958 * Returns the next txq if successful, %NULL if no queue is eligible. If a txq 6959 * is returned, it should be returned with ieee80211_return_txq() after the 6960 * driver has finished scheduling it. 6961 */ 6962 struct ieee80211_txq *ieee80211_next_txq(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u8 ac); 6963 6964 /** 6965 * ieee80211_txq_schedule_start - start new scheduling round for TXQs 6966 * 6967 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 6968 * @ac: AC number to acquire locks for 6969 * 6970 * Should be called before ieee80211_next_txq() or ieee80211_return_txq(). 6971 * The driver must not call multiple TXQ scheduling rounds concurrently. 6972 */ 6973 void ieee80211_txq_schedule_start(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u8 ac); 6974 6975 /* (deprecated) */ 6976 static inline void ieee80211_txq_schedule_end(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u8 ac) 6977 { 6978 } 6979 6980 void __ieee80211_schedule_txq(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6981 struct ieee80211_txq *txq, bool force); 6982 6983 /** 6984 * ieee80211_schedule_txq - schedule a TXQ for transmission 6985 * 6986 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 6987 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface 6988 * 6989 * Schedules a TXQ for transmission if it is not already scheduled, 6990 * even if mac80211 does not have any packets buffered. 6991 * 6992 * The driver may call this function if it has buffered packets for 6993 * this TXQ internally. 6994 */ 6995 static inline void 6996 ieee80211_schedule_txq(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_txq *txq) 6997 { 6998 __ieee80211_schedule_txq(hw, txq, true); 6999 } 7000 7001 /** 7002 * ieee80211_return_txq - return a TXQ previously acquired by ieee80211_next_txq() 7003 * 7004 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 7005 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface 7006 * @force: schedule txq even if mac80211 does not have any buffered packets. 7007 * 7008 * The driver may set force=true if it has buffered packets for this TXQ 7009 * internally. 7010 */ 7011 static inline void 7012 ieee80211_return_txq(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_txq *txq, 7013 bool force) 7014 { 7015 __ieee80211_schedule_txq(hw, txq, force); 7016 } 7017 7018 /** 7019 * ieee80211_txq_may_transmit - check whether TXQ is allowed to transmit 7020 * 7021 * This function is used to check whether given txq is allowed to transmit by 7022 * the airtime scheduler, and can be used by drivers to access the airtime 7023 * fairness accounting without going using the scheduling order enfored by 7024 * next_txq(). 7025 * 7026 * Returns %true if the airtime scheduler thinks the TXQ should be allowed to 7027 * transmit, and %false if it should be throttled. This function can also have 7028 * the side effect of rotating the TXQ in the scheduler rotation, which will 7029 * eventually bring the deficit to positive and allow the station to transmit 7030 * again. 7031 * 7032 * The API ieee80211_txq_may_transmit() also ensures that TXQ list will be 7033 * aligned against driver's own round-robin scheduler list. i.e it rotates 7034 * the TXQ list till it makes the requested node becomes the first entry 7035 * in TXQ list. Thus both the TXQ list and driver's list are in sync. If this 7036 * function returns %true, the driver is expected to schedule packets 7037 * for transmission, and then return the TXQ through ieee80211_return_txq(). 7038 * 7039 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 7040 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface 7041 */ 7042 bool ieee80211_txq_may_transmit(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 7043 struct ieee80211_txq *txq); 7044 7045 /** 7046 * ieee80211_txq_get_depth - get pending frame/byte count of given txq 7047 * 7048 * The values are not guaranteed to be coherent with regard to each other, i.e. 7049 * txq state can change half-way of this function and the caller may end up 7050 * with "new" frame_cnt and "old" byte_cnt or vice-versa. 7051 * 7052 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface 7053 * @frame_cnt: pointer to store frame count 7054 * @byte_cnt: pointer to store byte count 7055 */ 7056 void ieee80211_txq_get_depth(struct ieee80211_txq *txq, 7057 unsigned long *frame_cnt, 7058 unsigned long *byte_cnt); 7059 7060 /** 7061 * ieee80211_nan_func_terminated - notify about NAN function termination. 7062 * 7063 * This function is used to notify mac80211 about NAN function termination. 7064 * Note that this function can't be called from hard irq. 7065 * 7066 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 7067 * @inst_id: the local instance id 7068 * @reason: termination reason (one of the NL80211_NAN_FUNC_TERM_REASON_*) 7069 * @gfp: allocation flags 7070 */ 7071 void ieee80211_nan_func_terminated(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 7072 u8 inst_id, 7073 enum nl80211_nan_func_term_reason reason, 7074 gfp_t gfp); 7075 7076 /** 7077 * ieee80211_nan_func_match - notify about NAN function match event. 7078 * 7079 * This function is used to notify mac80211 about NAN function match. The 7080 * cookie inside the match struct will be assigned by mac80211. 7081 * Note that this function can't be called from hard irq. 7082 * 7083 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 7084 * @match: match event information 7085 * @gfp: allocation flags 7086 */ 7087 void ieee80211_nan_func_match(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 7088 struct cfg80211_nan_match_params *match, 7089 gfp_t gfp); 7090 7091 /** 7092 * ieee80211_calc_rx_airtime - calculate estimated transmission airtime for RX. 7093 * 7094 * This function calculates the estimated airtime usage of a frame based on the 7095 * rate information in the RX status struct and the frame length. 7096 * 7097 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 7098 * @status: &struct ieee80211_rx_status containing the transmission rate 7099 * information. 7100 * @len: frame length in bytes 7101 */ 7102 u32 ieee80211_calc_rx_airtime(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 7103 struct ieee80211_rx_status *status, 7104 int len); 7105 7106 /** 7107 * ieee80211_calc_tx_airtime - calculate estimated transmission airtime for TX. 7108 * 7109 * This function calculates the estimated airtime usage of a frame based on the 7110 * rate information in the TX info struct and the frame length. 7111 * 7112 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 7113 * @info: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame. 7114 * @len: frame length in bytes 7115 */ 7116 u32 ieee80211_calc_tx_airtime(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 7117 struct ieee80211_tx_info *info, 7118 int len); 7119 /** 7120 * ieee80211_set_hw_80211_encap - enable hardware encapsulation offloading. 7121 * 7122 * This function is used to notify mac80211 that a vif can be passed raw 802.3 7123 * frames. The driver needs to then handle the 802.11 encapsulation inside the 7124 * hardware or firmware. 7125 * 7126 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 7127 * @enable: indicate if the feature should be turned on or off 7128 */ 7129 bool ieee80211_set_hw_80211_encap(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, bool enable); 7130 7131 /** 7132 * ieee80211_get_fils_discovery_tmpl - Get FILS discovery template. 7133 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 7134 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 7135 * 7136 * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb. 7137 * 7138 * Return: FILS discovery template. %NULL on error. 7139 */ 7140 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_get_fils_discovery_tmpl(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 7141 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 7142 7143 /** 7144 * ieee80211_get_unsol_bcast_probe_resp_tmpl - Get unsolicited broadcast 7145 * probe response template. 7146 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 7147 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 7148 * 7149 * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb. 7150 * 7151 * Return: Unsolicited broadcast probe response template. %NULL on error. 7152 */ 7153 struct sk_buff * 7154 ieee80211_get_unsol_bcast_probe_resp_tmpl(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 7155 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 7156 7157 /** 7158 * ieeee80211_obss_color_collision_notify - notify userland about a BSS color 7159 * collision. 7160 * 7161 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 7162 * @color_bitmap: a 64 bit bitmap representing the colors that the local BSS is 7163 * aware of. 7164 * @gfp: allocation flags 7165 */ 7166 void 7167 ieeee80211_obss_color_collision_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 7168 u64 color_bitmap, gfp_t gfp); 7169 7170 /** 7171 * ieee80211_is_tx_data - check if frame is a data frame 7172 * 7173 * The function is used to check if a frame is a data frame. Frames with 7174 * hardware encapsulation enabled are data frames. 7175 * 7176 * @skb: the frame to be transmitted. 7177 */ 7178 static inline bool ieee80211_is_tx_data(struct sk_buff *skb) 7179 { 7180 struct ieee80211_tx_info *info = IEEE80211_SKB_CB(skb); 7181 struct ieee80211_hdr *hdr = (void *) skb->data; 7182 7183 return info->flags & IEEE80211_TX_CTL_HW_80211_ENCAP || 7184 ieee80211_is_data(hdr->frame_control); 7185 } 7186 7187 /** 7188 * ieee80211_set_active_links - set active links in client mode 7189 * @vif: interface to set active links on 7190 * @active_links: the new active links bitmap 7191 * 7192 * This changes the active links on an interface. The interface 7193 * must be in client mode (in AP mode, all links are always active), 7194 * and @active_links must be a subset of the vif's valid_links. 7195 * 7196 * If a link is switched off and another is switched on at the same 7197 * time (e.g. active_links going from 0x1 to 0x10) then you will get 7198 * a sequence of calls like 7199 * - change_vif_links(0x11) 7200 * - unassign_vif_chanctx(link_id=0) 7201 * - change_sta_links(0x11) for each affected STA (the AP) 7202 * (TDLS connections on now inactive links should be torn down) 7203 * - remove group keys on the old link (link_id 0) 7204 * - add new group keys (GTK/IGTK/BIGTK) on the new link (link_id 4) 7205 * - change_sta_links(0x10) for each affected STA (the AP) 7206 * - assign_vif_chanctx(link_id=4) 7207 * - change_vif_links(0x10) 7208 * 7209 * Note: This function acquires some mac80211 locks and must not 7210 * be called with any driver locks held that could cause a 7211 * lock dependency inversion. Best call it without locks. 7212 */ 7213 int ieee80211_set_active_links(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u16 active_links); 7214 7215 /** 7216 * ieee80211_set_active_links_async - asynchronously set active links 7217 * @vif: interface to set active links on 7218 * @active_links: the new active links bitmap 7219 * 7220 * See ieee80211_set_active_links() for more information, the only 7221 * difference here is that the link change is triggered async and 7222 * can be called in any context, but the link switch will only be 7223 * completed after it returns. 7224 */ 7225 void ieee80211_set_active_links_async(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 7226 u16 active_links); 7227 7228 #endif /* MAC80211_H */ 7229